Sie sind auf Seite 1von 394

FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION

FEDERAL
MIKE MONRONEY AERONAUTICAL CENTER
OKLAHOMA CITY, OKLAHOMA

Headquarters Building First Floor Slab


Replacement and Finish Repair
Specifications
Specifications
Construction Documents
May 29, 2015

OKLAHOMA CERTIFICATION OF AUTHORIZATION


Architecture: # 00199 P.E.: # 1072
Exp. 06/30/15 Exp. 06/30/16

Frankfurt-Short-Bruza
Architects Engineers Planners
5801 Broadway Extension, Suite 500
Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73118-7436
Telephone # (405) 840-2931 FAX # (405) 842-7750
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 010100 - SUMMARY OF WORK


SECTION 010190 - CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS
SECTION 010390 - COORDINATION AND MEETINGS
SECTION 013000 - SUBMITTALS
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY CONTROL
SECTION 015000 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
SECTION 016000 - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 017000 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY


SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION


SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
SECTION 078443 - JOINT FIRESTOPPING
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
SECTION 079513.13 - INTERIOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

SECTION 081213 - HOLLOW METAL FRAMES


SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
SECTION 085800 - ALUMINUM SLIDING TRANSACTION WINDOW
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

SECTION 090690 - COLOR SCHEDULE


SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

TOC - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD


SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

SECTION 123623.13 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS


SECTION 123661.16 - SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

SECTION 211313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)

SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION
SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION
SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING
SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS
SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
SECTION 233600 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS
SECTION 233713.13 - AIR DIFFUSERS
SECTION 233713.23 - AIR REGISTERS AND GRILLES
SECTION 234100 - PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 260539 - UNDERFLOOR RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 260544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

SECTION 270000 – TELECOMMUNICATIONS STANDARDS FOR THE MIKE MONRONEY


AERONAUTICAL CENTER

TOC - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

SECTION 283111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

SECTION 316600 - HELICAL PIERS

TOC - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 010100 - SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Work Description.

B. Contractor use of site and premises.

C. Permits and Licenses.

D. Owner occupancy.

E. Alternates.

1.2 WORK DESCRIPTION

A. Work Location: Federal Aviation Administration, Mike Monroney Aeronautical Center,


5900 SW 64th St., Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73169.

1. Headquarters Building.

B. Completion of Work: The Contractor shall be required to (a) commence Work under this
contract within the designated calendar days after the date the Contractor receives the
notice to proceed, (b) execute the Work diligently, and (c) complete the entire Work ready
for occupancy and use not later than 180 days after notice to proceed.

C. Work Includes: First floor concrete slab in the designated areas with a structural slab
supported by helical piers. Interior construction will be replaced in these same areas. The
interior construction will extend beyond the limits of the slab replacement.

1.3 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES

A. Limit use of site and premises to allow:

1. Owner occupancy.
2. Work by others.

B. Access to Site: Limited to area required for construction.

C. Security Requirements: Contractor shall comply with all applicable Department of


Transportation (DOT), FAA, and MMAC security directives while performing Work of
this contract.

D. Time Restrictions: Work shall be conducted between 7:00 a.m. and 4:30 p.m. on normal
government workdays. Work causing odors or excessive noise, as determined by FAA,

010100 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

including concrete slab demolition and removal work, shall occur at night, or on
Saturday’s, Sunday’s or designated government holidays as approved by the Contracting
Officer seven (7) days in advance.

E. Utility Outages and Shutdown: Coordinate with the Contracting Officer and Project
Manager at 954-4574. Outages affecting FAA Operations are required to be accomplished
at night, or on Saturday’s, Sunday’s or designated government holidays. Prior to any
outage or shutdown, fourteen (14) working days notification must be made to coordinate
scheduling of any Work to be performed during any hours.

F. Contractor staging shall be on the west side of Headquarters Building between building and
parking lot.

1.4 PERMIT AND LICENSES

A. Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, licenses, special inspections, etc. required
in the execution of the Work, whether of a permanent or temporary nature.

B. Contractor shall submit for airway clearance (crane permit) for any new buildings, towers,
light poles or temporary construction cranes over 27 feet high. Contractor shall use a
licensed land surveyor to perform a 1A survey. Contractor shall be responsible for
submitting the request through the Oklahoma City Department of Airports, Attn: OCAT
Staff, 7100 Terminal Drive, P.O. Box 937, Oklahoma City, OK 73159-0937; telephone
number 405-316-3221. Contractor shall obtain a permit number at the time of application
for future tracking. Contractor shall also label “RUSH” on the permit application. The
airway clearance request can take up to 45 calendar days to get approved.

1.5 OWNER OCCUPANCY

A. The FAA will occupy the premises and building during the entire period of construction.
Phase 1 area will be unoccupied when Contractor receives notice to proceed. At
completion of Phase 1 the occupants from Phase 2 area will relocate to Phase 1 area, thus
there will be a two-week delay between Phases 1 and 2.

B. Cooperate with FAA to minimize conflict, and to facilitate FAA's operations.

C. Work Sequence: This is a two-phase project. Phase 1 is area north of main lobby and
Phase 2 is south of the main lobby. Contractor shall submit a detailed construction phasing
schedule describing when each phase of construction is scheduled, for each section of the
building. There is asbestos floor tile throughout space to be renovated. This removal of
asbestos tile is not part of this contract. However, when interior demolition above slab is
complete in both phases, then Contractor must allow the independent asbestos contractor to
occupy jobsite to remove tile. Once tile is removed, then the Contractor can proceed with
slab removal.

010100 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1.6 ALTERNATES

A. Alternate No. 1: The interior finish construction above concrete slab, including
Mechanical and Electrical, for the Phase 2 tenant space.

1.7 UNIT PRICING

A. Not Used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION 010100

010100 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

PROPOSAL FORM

The contractor shall furnish all labor, tools, materials, equipment, and supplies, necessary to
accomplish the construction project set forth below, in accordance with the attached specifications,
drawings, and the other terms, conditions, and provisions as set forth herein.

BASE BID

Base Bid Phase 1 Complete plus Phase 2 Shell LUMP SUM $ ________________
Space

TOTAL For Base Bid $ ________________

ALTERNATES

Alternate Phase 2 Tenant Finish Interior LUMP SUM $ ________________


No. 1 Construction Above Slab

010100 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 010190 - CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Schedule of values.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 016000 - Material and Equipment: Product substitutions and options.

1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Submit typed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment
Continuation Sheet. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be
considered as long as information matches G703.

B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within fifteen (15) days after date established in
Notice to Proceed.

C. Format: As a minimum, utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual regardless of
how work is subcontracted. Identify each line item with number and title of major
specification sections. The Architect-Engineer shall have the right to add or subtract line
items to the Contractor’s proposed schedule.

D. Contractor's overhead and profit shall not be proportionally distributed among line items,
but shall be listed as a separate line item.

E. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application for Payment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION 010190

010190 - 1
FAA - WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 010390 - COORDINATION AND MEETINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Coordination.

B. Pre-construction meeting.

C. Progress meetings.

D. Examination.

E. Preparation.

F. Cutting and Patching.

G. Alteration Project procedures.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of the Project Manual
to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction
elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later.

B. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for


Substantial Completion.

1.3 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. Contracting Officer will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award.

B. Attendance Required: Contracting Officer, Project Manager, and Contractor.

C. Agenda:

1. Distribution of Contract Documents.


2. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and
progress schedule.
3. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract.
4. Procedures and processing of field decisions, Submittals, Substitutions, Applications
for Payments, Proposal Request, Change Orders, and Contract Closeout procedures.
5. Scheduling.
6. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor.
7. Requirements for start-up of equipment.
8. Security and housekeeping procedures.

010390 - 1
FAA - WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

D. Record minutes and distribute copies within seven (7) days after meeting to participants,
with two (2) copies to Contracting Officer, Project Manager and participants, and those
affected by decisions made.

1.4 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum bi-weekly
intervals, unless otherwise required by the Contracting Officer.

B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at
meetings.

C. Attendance Required: Job Superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers.


Contracting Officer, Project Manager and others as appropriate to agenda topics for each
meeting.

D. Agenda:

1. Review minutes of previous meetings.


2. Review of Work progress.
3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.
4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress.
5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.
7. Maintenance of progress schedule.
8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
9. Planned progress during succeeding work period.
10. Coordination of projected progress.
11. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.
13. Other business relating to Work.

E. Record minutes and distribute copies within seven (7) days after meeting to participants,
with two (2) copies to Contracting Officer, Project Manager and participants, and those
affected by decisions made.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS:

A. When required in individual specification Section, convene a preinstallation meeting at work


site prior to commencing work of the Section.

B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific Section.

C. Notify Architect-Engineer four days in advance of meeting date.

D. Prepare agenda, preside at meeting, record minutes, and distribute copies within two days
after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect-Engineer.

E. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, and coordination


with related work.

010390 - 2
FAA - WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent
Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural attachment of new Work being
applied or attached.

C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification Sections.

D. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct
location.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.

B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.

C. Apply any manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner


prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.

3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching in locations as
required.

B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements which affects:

1. Structural integrity of element.


2. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements.
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element.
4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.
5. Work of OCAT, FAA or separate Contractor.

C. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work, and
to:

1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work.


2. Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work.
3. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming Work.
4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing.

010390 - 3
FAA - WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical


Work.

D. Execute Work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide proper
surfaces to receive patching and finishing.

E. Cut masonry and concrete materials using masonry saw or core drill.

F. Restore Work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

G. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.

H. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids.

I. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest
intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit.

J. Identify any hazardous substance or condition exposed during the Work to the Contracting
Officer for decision or remedy.

3.4 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES

A. Materials: As specified in Product Sections. Match existing Products and Work for
patching and extending Work.

B. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching.

C. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing Work from weather and extremes of
temperature and humidity.

D. Remove, cut, and patch Work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide a means of
restoring Products and finishes to original or specified condition.

E. Refinish existing visible surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified
condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes.

F. Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing, provide a smooth and even transition.
Patch Work to match existing adjacent Work in texture and appearance.

G. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new Work is not possible,
terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and submit
recommendation to Contracting Officer for review.

H. Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing
a smooth transition to Contracting Officer for review.

I. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or
showing other imperfections.

J. Finish surfaces as specified in individual Product Sections.

010390 - 4
FAA - WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

K. Restore site staging areas, utilized for removal of concrete slab and other demolished items,
back to preconstruction conditions.

END OF SECTION 010390

010390 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 013000 - SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Submittal Schedule.

B. Submittal procedures.

C. Format of Submittals.

D. Construction progress schedules.

E. Proposed Products list.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 014000 - Quality Control: Manufacturers' field services and reports.

B. Section 017000 - Contract Closeout: Contract warranties, bonds, manufacturers' certificates,


and closeout submittals.

1.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULES

A. Submit to the Contracting Officer three (3) copies of a submittal schedule at the first progress
meeting. Schedule shall include but not be limited to specification Section number,
specification title, paragraph number, and/or drawing number, description of submitted item,
date submitted, date to location, reviewer action. Update the schedule at each subsequent
progress meeting. Refer to example of schedule as attached at the end of this Section.

1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Transmit each submittal electronically with Contracting Officer accepted completed transmittal
form as attached to this specification Section.

B. Sequentially number the transmittal forms. Revise submittals with original number and a
sequential alphabetic suffix. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section
number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01).
Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-
061000.01.A).

C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or Supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number,
and specification Section number, as appropriate.

013000 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Products
required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in
accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.

E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Contracting Officer at business
address. Coordinate submission of related items.

F. For each submittal for review, allow fourteen (14) calendar days excluding delivery time to and
from the Contractor.

G. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations, which may be
detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.

H. Provide space for Contractor and Contracting Officer review stamps.

I. Revise and electronically resubmit, identify all changes made since previous submission.

J. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any
inability to comply with provisions.

K. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.

1.5 FORMAT OF SUBMITTALS

A. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as
follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal
requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling
navigation to each item.
2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval
markings and action taken by Architect.
4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from electronic
project management software acceptable to the Contracting Officer.

B. Submittals of entire systems shall be submitted as a complete unit with necessary appurtenances
related and/or a part of the systems unit. Systems shall be defined as follows but not limited to
those listed: HVAC, plumbing, and any other system which will require sub-systems for the
system to work in a manner as designed in the Contract Documents.

C. Identifying Submittals: Identify submittals, except sample panel and sample installation, with
the following information permanently adhered to or noted on each separate component of each
submittal and noted on the transmittal form. Tab indexed Section dividers as required to
separate components or Products. Mark each copy of each submittal identically, with the
following:

1. Project title and location.


2. Construction contract number.
3. The Section number of the specification Section by which the submittal is required.

013000 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

4. The name, address, and telephone number of the Subcontractor, supplier, manufacturer
and any other second tier Contractor associated with the submittal.
5. Product identification and location in Project.

D. Format for Product Data:

1. Submit product data electronically as specified in Article 1.5 above.


2. Indicate, by prominent notation, each Product which is being submitted; indicate the
specification Section number and paragraph number to which it pertains. Identify
applicable Products, models, options, and other data. Provide results of test reports
specified in each specification Section. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to
provide information unique to this Project.
3. Indicate Product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and
location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.
4. Supplement Product data with material prepared for the Project to satisfy submittal
requirements for which Product data does not exist. Identify this material as developed
specifically for the Project.
5. After review distribute in accordance with the Submittal Procedures article above and
provide copies for record documents described in Section 017000 - Contract Closeout.

E. Format for Shop Drawings:

1. Submit product data electronically as specified in Article 1.5 above.


2. Shop drawings shall be formatted to be not be less than 8 1/2 by 11 inches nor more than
30 x 42 inches. Include on each drawing the drawing title, number, date, and revision
numbers and dates, in addition to the information required in the paragraph entitled
"Identifying Submittals." Dimension drawings, except diagrams and schematic
drawings; prepare drawings demonstrating interface with other trades to scale. Identify
materials and Products for Work shown.
3. Shop Drawings: Submit for review. After review, produce copies and distribute in
accordance with the SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article above and for record
documents purposes described in Section 017000 - Contract Closeout.
4. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and
location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.

F. Format of Samples:

1. Furnish samples in the sizes below, unless otherwise specified or unless the manufacturer
has prepackaged samples of approximately the same size as specified:

a. Sample of Equipment or Device: Full size.


b. Sample of Materials less than 2 by 3 inches: Built up to 8 1/2 by 11 inches.
c. Sample of Materials exceeding 8 1/2 by 11 inches: Cut down to 8 1/2 by 11 inches
and adequate to indicate color, texture, and material variations.
d. Sample of Linear Devices or Materials: 10-inch length or length to be supplied, if
less than 10 inches. Examples of linear devices or materials are conduit and
handrails.
e. Sample of Non-Solid Materials: Pint. Examples of non-solid materials are sand
and paint.
f. Color Selection Samples: 2 inches by 4 inches.
g. Sample Panel: 4 feet by 4 feet.

013000 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

h. Sample Installation: 100 square feet.

2. Submit the number of samples specified in individual specification Sections; one of


which will be retained by Contracting Officer.
3. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with
integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing
Work.
4. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors,
textures, and patterns for Contracting Officer selection, if color is not specified or
indicated on the Drawings.
5. Samples Showing Range of Variation: Where variations are unavoidable due to the
nature of the materials, submit sets of samples of not less than three units showing the
extremes and middle of the range.
6. Reusable Samples: Incorporate returned samples into the Work only if so specified or
indicated. Incorporated samples shall be in undamaged condition at the time of use.
7. Recording of Sample Installation: Note and preserve the notation of the area constituting
the sample installation but remove the notation at the final clean up of the Project.
8. When a color, texture or pattern is specified in naming a particular manufacturer and
style, include one sample of that manufacturer and style, for comparison.

G. Format of Administrative Submittals:

1. When the submittal includes a document which is to be used in the Project or become a
part of the Project record, other than as a submittal, do not apply the Contractor's
approval stamp to the document, but to a separate sheet accompanying the document.
2. Operation and Maintenance Manual Data: Submit in accordance with Section 017300,
Operation and Maintenance Data. Include components required in that Section and the
various technical Sections.

H. Manufacturer Installation Instructions:

1. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit printed instructions for


delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, to Contracting
Officer in quantities specified for Product Data.
2. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special
environmental criteria required for application or installation.

I. Manufacturer Certificates:

1. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit certification by manufacturer


to Contracting Officer, in quantities specified for Product Data.
2. Indicate material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit
supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
3. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be
acceptable to Contracting Officer.

1.6 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES

A. The purpose of the Project Schedule shall be to:

013000 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1. Assure adequate planning, scheduling and reporting during execution of the work by the
Contractor;
2. Assist the Contractor and the FAA in monitoring the progress of the work and evaluating
proposed changes to the Contract and the Project Schedule;
3. Assist the FAA and the Contractor in the preparation and evaluation of the Contractor's
progress payments.

B. The Contractor shall provide the computer processing of the computer produced schedule and
cost reports required under the contract at no additional cost to the FAA if requested. Software
used by the Contractor shall be capable of providing a schedule that complies with all the
requirements stated herein. A licensed and registered copy of the software used by the
Contractor shall be provided to the FAA and the Architect-Engineer.

C. The Contractor’s Project Schedule shall begin with the Notice to Proceed and conclude with the
Final Completion date of the Project.

D. Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule.

1. Provide critical path method (CPM) format, with horizontal activity schedules, written in
software, with detailed entries for each activity in each portion of the work, in
chronological order as defined in the following criteria.
2. The Project Schedule shall employ the Critical Path Method (CPM) using retained logic
for the planning, scheduling and reporting of the work to be performed under the
contract. The type of schedule shall be Precedence Diagramming Method (PDM).
3. Network Logic – Pure Logic Diagram:

a. The proposed logic and sequence that illustrates the approach the Contractor will
take to complete the Work. The proposed logic and sequence shall be prepared as a
Pure Logic Diagram.
b. The Contractor shall develop a list of activities that breaks the complete Work into
the smallest practical work unit. The Contractor's network shall consist of, but not
be limited to, the following:

1) Proposed procurement/fabrication/delivery activities.


2) Proposed construction activities.
3) Proposed submittal activities.
4) Proposed sequencing (logic) of activities with activity to activity
relationships.
5) Milestone events.

c. The following, as a minimum, shall be defined on the Network for each activity:

1) Activity ID: An alpha-numeric activity number for all schedule activities.


2) Activity Description: Concise description of the work represented by the
activity. The work related to each activity shall be limited to one work trade.

d. The Network Logic shall determine the sequence for complete performance of the
Work by establishing the logic ties between the activities via predecessor/successor
relationships. Activity relationships shall be limited to the following types:

013000 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1. Finish to Start (FS) - a new activity cannot start until the preceding activity
is finished.
2. Start to Start (SS) - a new activity cannot start any earlier than the start of
the preceding activity.
3. Finish to Finish (FF) - a new activity cannot finish any later than the
preceding activity is finished.
4. Start to Finish (SF) - a preceding activity cannot start any earlier than the
new activity is finished.
5. Include all lags in activity relationships. Lags may be either positive or
negative depending on the activity relationships and sequence.

4. Final Network:

a. After acceptance of the Network Logic/Pure Logic Diagram, the Contractor shall
develop the Final Network. This shall be done by providing each activity in the
Pure Logic Diagram with a time duration based on a specific calendar in
accordance with the following:

1) Activity Duration: In whole days with a maximum duration of ten (10) days
each, except for non-construction activities including mobilization, shop
drawing and sample submittals, fabrication of materials, delivery of
materials and equipment and concrete curing.
2) Work Calendar: Calendar shall be based on 5 day work week and shall
account for all Government holidays.

5. There shall be no constrained activities except the Final Acceptance activity.

5. Submittal:

a. Within seven (7) calendar days of Notice of Award of the Contract submit to the
FAA the Network Logic for completion of the Work in the form of a Pure Logic
Diagram.
b. Within seven (7) calendar days of submission of Network Logic, meet with the
FAA to review the Network Logic. The purpose of this meeting is for the FAA to
accept the logic and sequence. This shall be repeated until the logic and sequence
is accepted.
c. Within fourteen (14) calendar days of the acceptance of the Network Logic, submit
Final Network to the FAA for review.
d. Within seven (7) calendar days of submission of the Final Network, the FAA shall
meet with the Contractor to review the schedule. The purpose of this meeting is
for the FAA to accept the Final Network. This shall be repeated until the Final
Network is accepted.
e. The Contractor shall submit four (4) prints of the Network Logic and Final
Network to the FAA. The Network Logic shall be neatly organized and plotted
pure logic diagrams from left to right on 22" x 34" standard size sheets with
suitable notation relating the interface points among sheets. The Final Network
shall be neatly organized and plotted in GANTT chart format on 22” x 34”
standard size sheets with suitable notation relating the interface points among
sheets. Network logic shall be clearly shown on the GANTT chart. The Final
Network shall clearly show the critical path. The Contractor shall also provide an
electronic copy of the Network Logic and Final Network and all subsequent

013000 - 6
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

schedule updates, revisions and recovery plans. Media for electronic transfer shall
be mutually agreed to prior to the first submission.
f. All abbreviations used in development of the Network Logic shall be fully
described in an activity code dictionary report included with this submission

6. After acceptance by the FAA, the Final Network shall be referred to thereafter as the
Target 1 Project Schedule. The Target 1 Project Schedule shall be maintained in a non-
updated and non-revised condition and shall be archived onto electronic media and stored
in a manner to prevent damage to the information.

E. Schedule Maintenance

1. General: During the progress of the Work, the network shall be maintained by the
Contractor. This maintenance will include Updates and Revisions as required and
specified herein. The most recent update of the network shall be designated as Current
Schedule.
2. Updating the Network: The network shall be updated to reflect actual progress made. It
shall not be considered revisions to the network. The updating process shall be
accomplished in the following sequence:

a. Contractor shall submit marked-up copies of the update reports submitted for the
Current Schedule.
b. Convene a Schedule Update Meeting to review proposed schedule updates.
c. Contractor shall incorporate accepted updates to the Current Schedule.
d. Updating the Current Schedule shall in no way change the network logic.
e. The monthly updating of the network shall be an integral part and basic element of
the estimate upon which progress payments will be made. If, in the judgment of
the FAA the Contractor fails or refuses to provide information required to
accomplish a complete Current Schedule Update, the Contractor shall be deemed
to have not provided the required estimate upon which progress payments may be
made, and shall not be entitled to progress payments until it has furnished the
information necessary for a complete Current Schedule Update to the satisfaction
of the FAA.

3. Revising the Network: If at any time the FAA and Contractor determine that the network
for the Current Schedule does not accurately represent the actual prosecution and
progress of the work, then it shall be revised.

a. In the event the Contractor's planning for the work is revised, changes in the
network to reflect revisions in its method of operating and scheduling of the Work
shall be proposed. The Contractor shall notify the FAA in writing, stating the
reason for the proposed revisions. Accepted revisions shall be incorporated into
the network for the Current Schedule immediately at no additional cost to the
FAA.
b. FAA’s proposed revisions to the network for the Current Schedule will not be
incorporated into the network without written notice to the Contractor, who shall
respond in writing within seven (7) calendar days, either agreeing with the FAA’s
proposed revision, or setting forth justification why it should not be accomplished.
If the Contractor's justification for not accomplishing the revision is accepted, such
revision will not be incorporated into the network. The Contractor's failure to
respond in writing within seven (7) calendar days will be deemed to be an

013000 - 7
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

acceptance of the FAA’s proposed revisions, and the Contractor shall incorporate
such revisions into the network at no additional cost to the FAA.

c. Acceptance:

1) Prior to incorporating the revision into the network, there shall be a Network
Revision meeting conducted by the Contractor. At this meeting the revision
shall be presented and explained by the Contractor to the FAA. At that time
the FAA shall accept the revision.
2) Immediately after the Network Revision meeting, the Contractor shall revise
the network in accordance with agreements reached during the meeting.

d. Upon acceptance of the revised network by the FAA it shall become the new
Target Schedule and shall be designated as Target 2 Project Schedule. All
subsequent revised networks shall be sequentially numbered.

F. Network Analysis for Change Modifications, Delays and Contractor Requested Revisions:

1. When change orders are executed, delays are experienced, or the Contractor desires to
revise the network for the Current Schedule, the Contractor shall submit to the FAA a
written Network Analysis illustrating the influence on the Contract time each change
order, delay, or Contractor requested revision. The Network Analysis shall demonstrate
the time impact based on the date the change order is given to the Contractor or the date
the delay occurred; the status of construction at that point in time; and the event time
computation of all affected activities. The event times used in the Network Analysis
shall be those included in the latest Project Schedule Update or as adjusted by mutual
agreement.
2. Activity delays shall not automatically mean that an extension of the Contract time is
warranted or due the Contractor. It is possible that a change order or delay will not affect
existing critical activities or cause non-critical activities to become critical. A change
order or delay may result in only absorbing a part of the available total float that may
exist within an activity chain of the Network, thereby not causing any effect on the
Contract time.

a. Float is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the FAA or the Contractor but
is jointly owned expiring project resources available to both parties as needed to
meet the schedule milestones and the contract completion date. Extension of the
Contract time will be granted only when the extension of time is agreed to by the
FAA and the Contractor only to the extent that the equitable time adjustments to
the activity or activities affected by the change order or delay exceeds the total
(positive or zero) float of a critical activity (or path) and extends the contract time.
Pursuant to these float sharing requirements, no time extensions will be granted
until a delay occurs that impacts the project’s critical path, consumes all available
float and extends the work beyond the contract completion date.

3. Four (4) copies of each Network Analysis shall be submitted as follows:

a. Along with the proposal for any requested change.


b. Within seven (7) calendar days after receipt of a written change order.
c. Within seven (7) calendar days after the furnishing of a written notice by the FAA.

013000 - 8
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

d. Within seven (7) calendar days from the beginning of a delay from unforeseeable
causes.
e. In cases where the Contractor does not submit a Time Impact Analysis within the
time stated herein, it is mutually agreed that the particular change order, delay or
Contractor requests revision does not impact the Current Schedule and does not
require an extension of the contract time.

4. Acceptance or rejection of each Network Analysis by the FAA shall be made after receipt
of each Network Analysis, unless subsequent meetings and negotiations are necessary.
Upon acceptance, a copy of the Network Analysis shall be immediately incorporated into
the Project Schedule.

5. Network Analysis related to an extension of the Contract time and/or change order work
shall be incorporated into and attached to the applicable change order(s).

G. Schedule Recovery:

1. If the Contractor’s Project Schedule Update reflects that the Contractor is behind the
Current Schedule as indicated by the following:

a. Negative float for any activity in excess of one (1) day;


b. An activity not on the original critical path that, because of the delay or anticipated
delay, becomes a critical path activity;

then the Contractor shall submit with the Project Schedule Update a proposed Schedule
Recovery plan that outlines the steps as may be necessary to improve progress of the
Work and bring the Work back on the Current Schedule. All additional work described
in the proposed Schedule Recovery plan shall be completed without additional cost to the
Owner. This shall be deemed as recovery by the Contractor and not acceleration.

2. The requirements necessary to improve progress of the work shall not be construed as
prohibiting the Contractor from increasing the hours of work, the number of shifts,
overtime operations and/or the amount of construction plant and equipment or working
on Saturdays, Sundays and holidays, provided the Contractor gives reasonable notice to
the FAA and Architect/Engineer.
3. Failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements of this paragraph shall be a
basis for determination by the FAA that the Contractor is not prosecuting the work with
such diligence as will ensure completion within the contract time. Upon such
determination, the FAA may terminate the Contractor's right to proceed with the work or
any separable part thereof, or may take such other actions as may be deemed appropriate.

H. Performance Monitoring:

1. At frequent intervals agreed to by the FAA and the Contractor, the Contractor shall
submit to the FAA, on portions of the computer produced reports for the Current
Schedule, a status report of any progress which has occurred in any schedule activity,
including:

a. Percent Complete
b. Actual Start / Finish Dates

013000 - 9
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

This status report shall also include a check mark indicating which activities the
Contractor plans to start, or to continue during the next interval. This status report shall
serve as a basis for discussion at the project progress meetings. These actual start and
finish dates and percentages of completion estimates will be used by the FAA to record
actual progress and evaluate the monthly Project Schedule Update.

1.7 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST

A. Within fifteen (15) days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit list of major Products proposed
for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each Product.

B. For Products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or
catalog designation, and reference standards.

C. Within 15 days after Notice to Proceed, submit a “Waste Management Plan.”

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION 013000

013000 - 10
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Quality assurance - control of installation.

B. Tolerances

C. References.

D. Manufacturers' field services and reports.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 013000 - Submittals: Submission of manufacturers' instructions and certificates.

B. Section 016000 - Material and Equipment: Requirements for material and Product quality.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE - CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, services, site conditions,
and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.

C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification


from Contracting Officer before proceeding.

D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more
stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more
precise workmanship.

E. Perform Work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.

F. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand
stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement.

1.4 TOLERANCES

A. Monitor tolerance control of installed Products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit
tolerances to accumulate.

B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with


Contract Documents, request clarification from Contracting Officer before proceeding.

014000 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

C. Adjust Products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing Products in place.

1.5 REFERENCES

A. For Products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards,


comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are
specified or are required by applicable codes.

B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents


except where a specific date is established by code.

C. Obtain copies of standards where required by Product specification Sections.

D. The contractual relationship, duties, and responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those
of the Contracting Officer shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or
inference otherwise in any reference document.

1.6 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS

A. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Product suppliers


or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions
of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, as applicable, and to initiate
instructions when necessary.

B. Submit qualifications of observer to Contracting Officer thirty (30) days in advance of


required observations. Observer subject to approval of Contracting Officer.

C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that
are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.

D. Submit report in duplicate within thirty (30) days of observation to Contracting Officer for
information.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION 014000

014000 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 015000 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, telephone service, water, and
sanitary facilities.

B. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures and fencing, protection of the Work, and water
control.

C. Construction Facilities: Progress cleaning.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 017000 - Contract Closeout: Final cleaning.

1.3 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY

A. Connect to FAA's existing power service. Do not disrupt FAA’s need for continuous
service. FAA will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy.

1.4 TEMPORARY LIGHTING

A. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. It will be the


responsibility of the Contractor to turn the lights off at the end of each day. FAA will pay
cost of energy used.

1.5 TEMPORARY HEAT

A. Utilize FAA's existing heat plant, extend and supplement with Contractor supplied
temporary heat devices as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction
operations.

B. FAA will pay cost of energy used from existing heat plant. Contractor is responsible for
paying for and maintaining temporary heating devices used or required during
construction. Exercise measures to conserve energy

1.6 TEMPORARY VENTILATION

A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent
accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.

015000 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Utilize existing ventilation equipment. Extend and supplement equipment with temporary
fan units as required to maintain clean air for construction operations.

1.7 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE

A. Contractor will be required to provide cellular or mobile phone service. FAA telephone
service will not be available.

1.8 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE

A. Connect to existing water source for construction operations.

B. FAA will pay cost of water used. Exercise measures to conserve water

C. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded
connections. Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing.

1.9 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Existing designated facilities located at the building may be used during construction
operations. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition.

B. At the end of construction, return facilities to same or better condition as originally found.

1.10 BARRIERS

A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas to allow for FAA’s use
of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from
construction operations.

B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public
rights-of-way and for public access to existing building.

C. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.

1.11 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES

A. Provide temporary partitions as required to separate work areas from FAA occupied areas,
to prevent penetration of dust, fumes and excessive noise, as determined by FAA, into
FAA occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment.

B. Construction: Framing of 2 x wood and fire retardant reinforced polyethylene sheet


materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces.
Maximum flame spread rating of 25 in accordance with ASTM E 84.

015000 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1.12 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK

A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual
specification Sections.

B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in
immediate work area to prevent damage.

1.13 PROGRESS CLEANING AND WASTE REMOVAL

A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and
orderly condition.

B. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site daily and dispose
off-site.

C. Submit a waste management plan prior to removal of demolished items.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. The Contractor may use existing utilities without charge, if available; however, the
Contractor, at his own expense and in a workmanlike manner satisfactory to the
Contracting Officer, shall furnish, install, and maintain all necessary temporary
connections and distribution lines, and shall remove same prior to final acceptance of the
construction.

END OF SECTION 015000

015000 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 016000 - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Products.

B. Transportation and handling.

C. Storage and protection.

D. Product options.

E. Substitutions.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 014000 - Quality Control: Product quality monitoring.

1.3 PRODUCTS

A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically
permitted by the Contract Documents.

B. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacture, for components being


replaced.

1.4 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Transport and handle Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that Products comply with requirements, quantities
are correct, and Products are undamaged.

C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent soiling,


disfigurement, or damage.

1.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Store and protect Products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, with seals and
labels intact and legible.

B. Store sensitive Products in weather tight, climate controlled enclosures.

016000 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

C. For exterior storage of fabricated Products, place on sloped supports, above ground.

D. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or
protection.

E. Cover Products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide


ventilation to avoid condensation or potential degradation of Product.

F. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing
with foreign matter.

G. Provide equipment and personnel to store Products by methods to prevent soiling,


disfigurement, or damage.

H. Arrange storage of Products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify
Products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.

1.6 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any Product meeting


those standards or description.

B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of manufacturers


named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.

C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for


Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named in
accordance with the following article.

1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Contracting Officer will consider requests for Substitutions only within ten (10) days after
award of Contract.

B. Substitutions may be considered when a Product becomes unavailable through no fault of


the Contractor.

C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed


Substitution with Contract Documents.

D. A request constitutes a representation that the Contractor:

1. Has investigated proposed Product and determined that it meets or exceeds the
quality level of the specified Product.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified Product.
3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work, which may be
required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to FAA.
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension, which may subsequently
become apparent.

016000 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

5. Will reimburse Contracting Officer for review or redesign services associated with
re-approval by authorities.

E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or
Product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require
revision to the Contract Documents.

F. Substitution Submittal Procedure:

1. Submit three (3) copies of request for Substitution for consideration on Substitution
Request Form attached to this Section. Limit each Substitution Request Form to one
(1) proposed Substitution.
2. Submit shop drawings, Product data, and certified test results attesting to the
proposed Product equivalence.
3. The Contracting Officer will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or
reject request.

G. If request for substitution is not accepted by the Contracting Officer, Contractor is


responsible for supplying item as originally specified or an acceptable substitution without
additional cost to the FAA.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION 016000

016000 - 3
FAA - WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 017000 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Procedures for final acceptance of the Project.

B. Closeout procedures.

C. Final cleaning.

D. Adjusting.

E. Project record documents.

F. Operation and maintenance data.

G. Warranties.

H. Spare parts and maintenance materials.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 015000 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Progress cleaning.

1.3 PROCEDURES FOR FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE PROJECT

A. Pre-final inspection:

1. When the Contractor has completed all Work in Phase 1and is satisfied the Project is
in compliance with the Contract Documents; he will notify the Contracting Officer,
in writing, that the Project is complete and ready for inspection. The Contracting
Officer will arrange for and conduct an inspection of the Project by the Contracting
Officer, Project Manager, and the Contractor. The Contracting Officer will be
provided a reasonable time to arrange for and conduct an inspection. This process
will be repeated for Phase 2.
2. The Contracting Officer will document any deficiencies on a written punch list and
will arrange a meeting with the Contractor to review the punch list and explain all
deficient items. The Contractor will correct the deficiencies and notify the
Contracting Officer in writing, when the Project is ready for inspection of the
deficient items. The Contracting Officer will arrange and conduct a reinspection of
the Project to review the corrected items.
3. The formal list of deficiencies found shall not be considered a final list of all
deficient items. Any deficiencies found during inspection for substantial
completion, beneficial occupancy or inspection for final acceptance will be
corrected by the Contractor per the Contract Documents, prior to final acceptance.

017000 - 1
FAA - WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Instruction/Demonstration Operations of Systems and Equipment:

1. When the Contracting Officer has determined that the Project is sufficiently
complete to allow instruction/demonstration of equipment to FAA's staff, the
Contracting Officer will request, in writing, that the Contractor provide "Instruction
and Demonstration on Operation of Systems."
2. Upon formal notice from the Contracting Officer, the Contractor will then arrange
for instruction of the FAA's staff in the operation of the constructed systems. This
includes submission of all outstanding record documents, including operating and
maintenance manuals, equipment cuts, guarantees, warranties, maintenance
contracts, and any additional instructions necessary for the operation of the systems.
The Contractor will acquaint the FAA's staff with acceptance tests, guarantees,
warranties, and maintenance manuals. The Contractor will also obtain a Certificate
of Occupancy or similar releases required to permit the FAA's occupancy of the
Project (f required) for this Project.
3. Should the Instruction/Demonstration Training find deficiencies, the Contracting
Officer will notify the Contractor in writing of deficient items.

C. Substantial completion:

1. Upon completion of deficient items and instruction to the FAA, the Contractor will
arrange for an inspection of the Project with the Contracting Officer and the Project
Manager. This inspection may result in a list of additional items to complete after
occupancy, but before the final payment and/or may require additional correction
before occupancy by the FAA.
2. If the inspection confirms that the Project is "substantially complete" and is "ready
for occupancy", the Contracting Officer will issue a "Certificate of Substantial
Completion." The Certificate will confirm that the Project can be occupied for its
intended use. Attached to the Certificate will be any final punch list items to be
completed. Prior to issuance of the Certificate, the Contractor shall submit a
schedule for completion of remaining deficiencies, verified or amended by the
Contracting Officer.

D. Final inspection:

1. Upon completion of the remaining deficiencies the Contractor will notify the
Contracting Officer in writing, that the Project is complete and ready for a final
inspection. The Contracting Officer shall arrange for and conduct a final inspection
of the Project.

E. Final acceptance:

1. If final inspection indicates satisfactory completion of the Work, the Project


Manager, and the Contracting Officer will issue a change order adjusting to the final
quantities. Following acceptance of the final change order, receipt of required
affidavits, releases or waivers of lien, and consent of the surety for final payment the
Project Manager will issue a final "Certificate for Payment."

F. Additional inspection:

017000 - 2
FAA - WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1. Should the Project require inspections beyond inspections noted above, from pre-
final through final inspection, the Contracting Officer will reduce from the
Contractor's final payment those monies necessary to provide for the cost of the
additional inspections. The reduction shall not be considered as a part of any
"Liquidated Damages" for failure to complete within the specified contract time.
The reduction shall not be considered as a penalty to the Contractor; but shall be for
the actual cost of monies required for the reimbursement of fees for the Contracting
Officer and other specialist necessary for acceptance of the Project.

G. Excessive deficiencies found during inspections:

1. During any inspection of Project completion, if it is determined by the Contracting


Officer, that the Contractor has not sufficiently completed the Work in compliance
to the Contract Documents, the Contracting Officer may declare that the Project is
not sufficiently complete to continue inspection of the Work. Within three (3)
working days, of the declaration, the Contracting Officer will issue in writing, a list
of deficiencies found. The deficiency listed shall be understood as only a partial list
and that the partial list may or may not represent deficiencies in areas that were not
inspected.

1.4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been
inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for
Contracting Officer's review.

B. Provide submittals to Contracting Officer that are required by governing or other


authorities.

C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous
payments, and sum remaining due.

D. Submit with the final Application for Payment a complete certified list of Subcontractors
and material suppliers. Accompanying the list shall be a lien waiver signed by each
Subcontractor and material supplier as documentation verifying that payment has have
been made for services and materials required for completion of this Contract. Lien waiver
forms are available at the office of the Contracting Officer.

1.5 FINAL CLEANING

A. Execute final cleaning prior to final Project assessment.

B. Clean surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances,
polish transparent and glossy surfaces.

C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to
the surface and material being cleaned.

017000 - 3
FAA - WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

D. Clean site, only areas that were used for staging and adjacent areas that may need cleaning
due to wind blown construction debris; sweep-paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.

E. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site.

1.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.

1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain on site, one (1) set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to
the Work:

1. Drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Addenda.
4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.

B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Contracting Officer.

C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.

D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.

E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product Section description of actual
Products installed, including the following:

1. Manufacturer's name and Product model and number.


2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.

F. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual
construction including:

1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish floor datum.


2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and
appurtenances referenced to permanent surface improvements.
3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,
referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Details not on original Contract drawings.

G. Submit documents to Contracting Officer with claim for final Application for Payment.

017000 - 4
FAA - WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11-inch text pages, three D side ring binders with durable
plastic covers.

B. Prepare binder cover with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE


INSTRUCTIONS", title of Project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are
required.

C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized
as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.

D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system
description identified, typed on 24 pound white paper, in three parts as follows:

1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Contractor,


Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.
2. Part 2: Operation and Maintenance instructions arranged by system and subdivided
by specification Section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and
telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following:

a. Significant design criteria.


b. List of equipment.
c. Parts list for each component.
d. Operating instructions.
e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
f. Maintenance instructions for [special] finishes, including recommended
cleaning methods and materials, and special precautions identifying
detrimental agents.

3. Part 3: Project Documents and Certificates, including the following:

a. Shop drawings and Product data.


b. Air and water balance reports.
c. Certificates.
d. Photocopies of warranties [and bonds].

E. Submit one (1) draft copy of completed volumes fifteen (15) days prior to final inspection.
This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with comments. Revise
content of all document sets as required prior to final submission.

F. Submit two (2) sets of revised final volumes, within ten (10) days after final inspection.

1.9 WARRANTIES

A. Provide duplicate notarized copies.

B. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and
manufacturers.

017000 - 5
FAA - WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in three hole D side ring binder with durable
plastic cover.

D. Prepare binder cover with printed title "WARRANTIES", and title of Project.

E. Submit prior to final Application for Payment.

F. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated
submittal within ten (10) days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of
warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION 017000

017000 - 6
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.


2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent
damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and
reinstall where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed
and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and
reinstalled.

1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones
and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to
Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.

1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.


2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,
demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.

024119 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed
by selective demolition operations.
5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures
proposed for protecting individuals and property , for environmental protection , for dust
control, for odor control and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of
barriers.

B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending
dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.
2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
4. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of
Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.

C. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to
start of demolition.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as
far as practical.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.


2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify
Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate
contract.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

024119 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition
operations.

B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not
guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.

C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and


protect them against damage.

1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section


011000 "Summary."

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,


disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems
serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide


temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain
continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
2. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC
systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and


cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
b. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.

024119 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

c. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and


remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and
make equipment operational.
d. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and
remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
e. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and
to and from occupied portions of building.
2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of
existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage
and damage to structure and interior areas.
3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are
exposed during selective demolition operations.
4. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling
specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations
of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden
space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression
devices during flame-cutting operations.
4. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.

024119 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

5. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and


promptly dispose of off-site.
6. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
7. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Reuse of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result in end-of-Project rates for
reuse of building elements as follows. Do not demolish building elements beyond what is
indicated on Drawings without Architect's approval.

C. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items.


2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area indicated on Drawings.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and


remove.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or


otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project
site.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.


2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that
will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste
Management and Disposal."

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

024119 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.

END OF SECTION 024119

024119 - 6
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,


mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and
placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar
diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing,
and supports for concrete reinforcement.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having


jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.
2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing
Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency
laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician,
Grade II.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and
damage.

033000 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three
successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature
range required by ACI 301.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on
frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing


water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of
ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is
Contractor's option.
2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:

1. ACI 301.
2. ACI 117.

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient
to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with
ends square and free of burrs.

033000 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel
wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater
compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use
CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from
single source from single manufacturer.

B. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type II, gray.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 3M coarse aggregate or better, graded.
Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10
years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar
aggregates and cementitious materials.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal.


2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

D. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and


that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened
concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.

E. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Bituminous Vapor Retarder: 73 MIL (1.85mm) thick, composite sheet membrane comprised
of an elastomeric membrane bonded to a three-ply plasmatic matrix and a non-woven geotextile
fabric. Furnish manufacturer's accessories, including bonding asphalt, pointing mastics and
self-adhering joint tape.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Performance Based Spec: Blindside waterproofing membrane shall have the


following properties as determined by laboratory testing:

1) Membrane Thickness: 73 mil (1.85mm)


2) Low Temperature Flexibility, ASTM D1970: Pass
3) Resistance to Hydrostatic Head, ASTM D5385-93: 230' (70 m)

033000 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

4) Elongation, ASTM D412-06: >400%


5) Tensile Strength (film), ASTM D882: 9200 psi (63.4MPa)
6) Crack Cycling, ASTM C836: Pass
7) Puncture Resistance, ASTM E154: >210 lb. (>934 N)
8) Peel Adhesion to Concrete, ASTM D903: 10 lb/in (1754 N/m)
9) Moisture Vapor Transmission, ASTM E96 (Method B): 0.0011 perms
10) Resistance to Penetration by Termites, Texas A&M Method, Percentage of
Penetration: 0.0%
11) Resistance to Penetration by Pesticides, ASTM F2130, Percentage of
Penetration: 0.0%
12) Resistance to Fungi in Soil, GSA-PBS 07115 - 16 weeks: No Effect

2.7 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or
styrene butadiene.

C. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing
and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit
requirements, and as follows:

1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
hardened concrete.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture
designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than


portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 15 percent

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of


cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use high-range water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and


workability.
2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

033000 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial


slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a
w/c ratio below 0.50.

2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Suspended Slabs: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.


2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45.
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches or 8 inches, with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding
high-range water reducer.
4. Coarse aggregate: #67 stone

B. Concrete Toppings: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.


2. Slump Limit: 4 inches or 8 inches with 2 to 4 inches before adding high-range water
reducing admixture.

2.10 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.11 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C
94M, and furnish batch ticket information.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure
can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces.


2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

033000 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide
top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. Keyways shall not be
gouged out of the surface of the pour.
2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed
strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork
is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to
prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous
locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads
required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and
other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and
maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that
is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does
not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50
deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by
form-removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that support
weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day
design compressive strength.
2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without
loosening or disturbing shores.

033000 - 6
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new
form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.
Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete
surfaces unless approved by Architect.

3.4 SHORING AND RESHORING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and
reshoring.

1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.

3.5 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION

A. Bituminous Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair bituminous vapor retarder according to
manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and
supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that
reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld
crossing reinforcing bars.

1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to


minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset
laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with
wire.

3.7 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

033000 - 7
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across


construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through
sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.
3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset
joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder
intersection.
4. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
5. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened
or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate
or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded
items is complete and that required inspections are completed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless
approved by Architect.

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to
limitations of ACI 301.

D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness.
If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit
concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures
and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6
inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have
begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to
consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded
items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked


around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.

033000 - 8
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured
surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb
slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes
and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified
limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in


an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface
irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view,.

3.10 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small
or inaccessible to power-driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.
Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish.

C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by
hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of
trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that
would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere
as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with
fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish
with Architect before application.

033000 - 9
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in
place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with
in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to
complete the Work.

3.12 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather
protection during curing.

B. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after
loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder
of curing period.

C. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed
surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

D. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:

a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover


for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at
least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven
days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material
and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive


floor coverings.
b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
penetrating liquid floor treatments.
c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining
cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with
bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller


according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.

033000 - 10
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without
damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound
manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound does not interfere
with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3.13 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENT APPLICATION

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor
treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and
complete surface repairs.
2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than seven days' old.
3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet;
and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface
is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.

3.14 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month(s). Do not fill joints until
construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact
faces of joints clean and dry.

3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and
replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2
parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and
stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than
1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of
cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes
and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding
agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place
with bonding agent.

033000 - 11
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color.
Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before
proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than
surrounding surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and
structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and
verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that
penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
width, and other objectionable conditions.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired
areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges
to match adjacent floor elevations.
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low
areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor
elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.
6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter,
by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean,
square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around.
Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent.
Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without
coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.
Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar.
Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and
loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place
patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to
match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and
patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's
approval.

033000 - 12
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

END OF SECTION 033000

033000 - 13
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Concrete masonry units.


2. Clay face brick.
3. Mortar and grout.
4. Steel reinforcing bars.
5. Masonry-joint reinforcement.
6. Ties and anchors.
7. Embedded flashing.
8. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for brick salvaged and reuse from demolition.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:

1. Clay face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:

1. Masonry units.

a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.


b. For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls
within specified tolerances.
c. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67.

2. Cementitious materials. Include name of manufacturer, brand name, and type.


3. Mortar admixtures.

B. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.

042000 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

C. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and


equipment to be used to comply with requirements.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an
enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If
units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended, dry
mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered
weatherproof dispensing silos.

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
and oil.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls, and hold cover securely
in place.
2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,
secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe, and hold
cover in place.

B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such
masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading
coverings on ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.

C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost
or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in
TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

042000 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days
after completing cleaning.

D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in


TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single
source from single manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious
component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.

2.2 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL

A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by


requirements in the Contract Documents.

B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such
defects are exposed in the completed Work.

2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed
faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.

B. CMUs: ASTM C 90.

1. Density Classification: Lightweight.


2. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.

2.4 BRICK

A. Clay Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216 to match existing brick.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Light Red Matt, Vertical Scratch Surface by Lakewood Brick and Tile Co., Denver,
CO, or as approved by substitution request.

042000 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

2. Grade: SW.
3. Type: FBS.
4. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated
"not effloresced."
5. Size (Actual Dimensions): .
6. Size: Match existing brick.
7. provide face brick matching color range, texture, and size of existing adjacent brickwork.

2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for
cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar
color indicated.

1. Alkali content shall not be more than 0.1 percent when tested according to ASTM C 114.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing
no other ingredients.

D. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329/C 1329M.

E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or
crushed stone.

F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

G. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with


ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar
of composition indicated.

H. Water: Potable.

2.6 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.

B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry
unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch steel
wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated.

C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.

1. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel.


2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.187-inch diameter.
3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.187-inch diameter.

042000 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

4. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.187-inch diameter.


5. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet.

D. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry:

1. Adjustable (two-piece) type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face
shell of backing wythe and with separate adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections
having a maximum horizontal play of 1/16 inch and maximum vertical adjustment of
1-1/4 inches. Size ties to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least
5/8-inch cover on outside face.

2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. General: Ties and anchors shall extend at least 1-1/2 inches into veneer but with at least a
5/8-inch cover on outside face.

B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that
comply with the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, with ASTM A 153/A
153M, Class B-2 coating.

2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable,


adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated
polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may


be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Perm-A-Barrier


Wall Flashing.
2) W. R. Meadows, Inc.; Air-Shield Thru-Wall Flashing.
3) .

b. Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes, and
seaming materials produced by flashing manufacturer.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Weep/Cavity Vent Products: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Wicking Material: Absorbent rope, made from cotton or UV-resistant synthetic fiber, 1/4
to 3/8 inch in diameter, in length required to produce 2-inch exposure on exterior and 18
inches in cavity. Use only for weeps.

042000 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

2. Round Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Medium-density polyethylene, 3/8-inch OD by 4


inches long.
3. Rectangular Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches long.

B. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not
degrade within the wall cavity.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be


incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net.

2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,


retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise
indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.


2. Use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to
view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients
before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the
following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.

1. For reinforced masonry, use Type S.

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will
comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour
height.
2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for
specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi.
3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C
143M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

042000 - 6
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
to performance of the Work.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
4. Verify that substrates are free of substances that impair mortar bond.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify
actual locations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness
shown.

B. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install
cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

C. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and
textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

D. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.

E. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in.
per minute when tested according to ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp
but not wet at time of laying.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or
minus 1/4 inch.
2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/2 inch.
3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus
or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary
from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet,
3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

042000 - 7
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet,
1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8
inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet or 1/2-inch maximum.
7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more
than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for
warpage of units.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch,
with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.
2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more
than 1/8 inch.
3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8
inch or minus 1/4 inch.
4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than
1/8 inch.
5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line
by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next.

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at
other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in
running bond ; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at
corners or jambs.

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay CMUs as follows:

1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
2. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.
3. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where
cells are not grouted.
4. Fully bed units and fill cells with mortar at anchors and ties as needed to fully embed
anchors and ties in mortar.

042000 - 8
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient
mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head
joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 CAVITY WALLS

A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together as follows:

1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less
than one metal tie for 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area spaced not to exceed 24 incheso.c.
horizontally and 16 inches o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide
additional ties within 12 inches of openings and space not more than 36 inches apart
around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more
than 24 inches o.c. vertically.

a. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use
adjustable-type (two-piece-type) ties to allow for differential movement regardless
of whether bed joints align.

B. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds
away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or
remove mortar fins protruding into cavity.

3.7 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND CAVITY VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges,
other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could
puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on
sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal
penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing
manufacturer.
2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer
wythe, turned up a minimum of 8 inches, and 1-1/2 inches into the inner wythe.
3. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is
completed.

C. Install weep holes in exterior wythes and veneers in head joints of first course of masonry
immediately above embedded flashing.

1. Use specified weep/cavity vent products to form weep holes.


2. Space weep holes formed from plastic tubing or wicking material 16 inches o.c.

042000 - 9
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

D. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity
drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.

3.8 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

B. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough
strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for grout
placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

3.9 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install
in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes
or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding
with cleaning of masonry.
3. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical
Notes 20.
4. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A.

END OF SECTION 042000

042000 - 10
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Wood blocking and nailers.


2. Plywood backing panels.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include
physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency.
3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before
and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.
4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for
fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification
marking is representative of the material tested.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide
for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

061000 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is
indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in
contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no


arsenic or chromium.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC
Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood nailers, blocking, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor
barriers, and waterproofing.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with
requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with
fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test
method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

061000 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame


spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of
significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with
the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any
time during the test.

1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.


2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for
fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to
accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where
indicated.
3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according ASTM D
5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841.

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry


plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing


agency.

E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Concealed blocking.
2. Plywood backing panels.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:

1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber

C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber
of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will
interfere with its attachment and purpose.

D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in


thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.

061000 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative


treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and,
where indicated, flat washers.

G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed
in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete
as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class
Fe/Zn 5.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for
attaching other construction.

B. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities
requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with
classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.

C. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.

D. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with
function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or
optimum joint arrangement.

061000 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

E. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

F. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.

G. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails
snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to
shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate
locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces
unless otherwise indicated.

C. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install


continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

END OF SECTION 061000

061000 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.


2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced
architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet
installation.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips
required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction before cabinet
installation.
2. Section 123623.13 "Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops."
3. Section 123623.16 "Solid Surfacing Countertops."

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product, including high-pressure decorative laminate adhesive
for bonding plastic laminate and cabinet hardware and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Show details full size.


2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed
blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for installed in architectural
plastic-laminate cabinets.

C. Samples for Verification:

1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.
2. Wood-grain plastic laminates, 12 by 24 inches, for each type, pattern and surface finish.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product Certificates: For the following:

1. High-pressure decorative laminate.

064116 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful
in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have
been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas,
store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in
"Field Conditions" Article.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and
90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the
construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field
measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

C. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish
dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and
coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed
as indicated.

064116 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction,
finishes, installation, and other requirements.

1. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard
and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those
selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.

B. Grade: Premium.

C. Type of Construction: Frameless.

D. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay.

E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as


required by woodwork quality standard.

F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:

1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS.


2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.
3. Edges: Grade HGS.
4. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels.

G. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3,


Grade CLS.

a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch thick, matching
laminate in color, pattern, and finish.
b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide
surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade CLS.

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels with PVC or polyester edge
banding.
3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels.

H. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure


decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL.

I. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting
screws from interior of body.

1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical
fasteners or glued dovetail joints.

064116 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

J. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and
textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. As indicated in Section 090690 Color Schedule.

2.2 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality
standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.

B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of
referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless
otherwise indicated.

1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.


2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
3. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with
thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with
requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.

2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural
cabinets.

B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of
opening, self-closing.

C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter.

D. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.

E. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.

1. Grade 1: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel with polymer rollers.
2. For drawers more than 3 inches high but not more than 6 inches high and not more than
24 inches wide, provide Grade 1.

F. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.

G. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA
A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel
base.

064116 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

H. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product
class requirements in BHMA A156.9.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to
less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure
anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors.
Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls
and at floors.

C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement.

1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.

B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent


possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.

1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will
be complete.

C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical


work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in
diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove
splinters and burrs.

D. Drill cabinet sides at 1 inch increments vertically for installation of shelf rests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation


areas.

B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as
required.

064116 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.

B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not
completed in the shop.

C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at
cuts.

E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws
for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.

1. Use filler matching finish of items being installed.

F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a
straight line.
2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16
inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration
into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.

END OF SECTION 064116

064116 - 6
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Glass-fiber blanket.
2. Spray applied foam.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture,
soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET

A. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Unfaced : ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136
for combustion characteristics.

1. Sound Insulation: 2.5 pcf density batt insulation for sound attenuation.

B. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Foil Faced : ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective faced), Class B (faced
surface with a flame-propagation resistance of 0.12 W/sq. cm); Category 1 (membrane is a
vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:

072100 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

2.2 SPRAY APPLIED FOAM

A. Light density, open celled, flexible, 100 percent water blown polyurethane foam insulation.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:

a. Icynene Inc.; ICYNENE LD-C-50.

2. Conform to the following:

a. Heat Flow Reduction:

1) Thermal Resistance (R-Value/inch @75 deg F): ASTM C 518; 3.7 hr/sq
ft/degree F/BTU

a) Through 3.5 inches: 93 percent


b) Through 5.5 inches: 95 percent

b. Air Permeance (for 5.5 inches of material): ASTM E 2178; < 0.02 L/s.m2 @ 75
Pa
c. Water Vapor Transmission (for 5.5 inches of material): ASTM E 96; 11 perms
d. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed Rating: ASTM E 84

1) Flame Spread: Less than 20


2) Smoke Development: Less than 400
3) Oxygen Index: 23 percent

e. Bacterial and Fungal Growth and Food Value: Texas Tech. University; not a
source of food for mold (no growth)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections
capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and


applications.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice,
rain, or snow at any time.

072100 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill
voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths,
and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown
or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following
requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If
more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a
snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or
protected from contact with insulation.
4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced
blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to
flanges of metal studs.

B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where
required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:

1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum


volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft..

C. Spray Applied Insulation:

1. Site mix liquid components.


2. Apply insulation to substrates in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and
other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse
and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after
installation.

END OF SECTION 072100

072100 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 078443 "Joint Firestopping" for joints in or between fire-resistance-rated


construction.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For each condition anticipated.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in
compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified


testing agency, for penetration firestopping.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in


material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the
necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified
requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to
Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following


requirements:

1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to


authorities having jurisdiction.

078413 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in


"Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following
requirements:

a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing


and inspecting agency.
b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations
listed by the following:

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate


temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when
substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural
means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration


firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate


penetration firestopping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according
to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original
fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be
compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items
if any.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings


determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of
0.01-inch wg.

1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls .

C. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed


indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

078413 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

D. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to
install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by
penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency
for firestopping indicated.

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:

a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation.


b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to
prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
c. Fire-rated form board.
d. Fillers for sealants.

2. Temporary forming materials.


3. Substrate primers.
4. Collars.
5. Steel sleeves.

2.2 FILL MATERIALS

A. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during
exposure to moisture.

B. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with
intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

C. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric


sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.

D. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents,


inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.

E. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum


foil on one side.

F. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement,
fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a
nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

G. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases


filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant
additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect
pillows/bags from being easily removed.

H. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand
and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

I. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of


grade indicated below:

078413 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal
surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless
indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions.

2.3 MIXING

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping
manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required),
type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other
items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping
to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials
that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping.
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable
of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles
remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that


manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not
allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting
adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would
otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to
remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with
substrates.

078413 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation


instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that
penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove
damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems
complying with specified requirements.

END OF SECTION 078413

078413 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 078443 - JOINT FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls,


horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers.

1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: For each condition anticipated.

C. Product Schedule: For each joint firestopping system. Include location, illustration of
firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing agency.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: For each joint firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that joint firestopping systems have been
installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.

078443 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install joint firestopping systems when ambient or substrate
temperatures are outside limits permitted by joint firestopping system manufacturers or when
substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure joint firestopping systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural
means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that joint firestopping systems can be installed
according to specified firestopping system design.

B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate joint firestopping systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Joint Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other
gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which joint
firestopping systems are installed. Joint firestopping systems shall accommodate building
movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.

B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide joint firestopping systems


with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079.

1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the wall, floor,
or roof in or between which it is installed.

C. Exposed Joint Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than
25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

D. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming
materials, that are needed to install elastomeric fill materials and to maintain ratings required.
Use only components specified by joint firestopping system manufacturer and approved by the
qualified testing agency for conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

078443 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing fire-resistive joint systems, clean joints immediately to
comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following
requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with
adhesion of elastomeric fill materials or compromise fire-resistive rating.
2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum
bond with elastomeric fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning
operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by joint firestopping system manufacturer


using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of
bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation
instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support elastomeric fill
materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and
depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing elastomeric fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove
combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent
components of fire-resistive joint system.

C. Install elastomeric fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce
the following results:

1. Elastomeric fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to
achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply elastomeric fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints.
3. For elastomeric fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish
to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean off excess elastomeric fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by joint firestopping system
manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur.

078443 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure joint
firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If
damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce
fire-resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.

END OF SECTION 078443

078443 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Urethane joint sealants.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.

B. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples
with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material
matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by manufacturer and
witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by


manufacturer.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by
joint-sealant manufacturer.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.

079200 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not
comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified
warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or


replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements
specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from
the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant


manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and
minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be


incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Sonalastic TX1.


b. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL.
c. Sika Corporation U.S.; Sikaflex Textured Sealant.

079200 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent
movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be


incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Sonolastic SL 1.


b. Pecora Corporation; NR-201.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning
operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.


4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal.
b. Glass.

079200 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as


indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of
joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.


2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and
replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.


2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.

079200 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants
immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of walls and partitions.


b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT.

END OF SECTION 079200

079200 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 079513.13 - INTERIOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes interior expansion joint cover assemblies.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components


and profiles, and finishes for expansion joint cover assemblies.

B. Shop Drawings: For each expansion joint cover assembly.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, splices, block-out requirement, attachments to


other work, and line diagrams showing entire route of each expansion joint.
2. Where expansion joint cover assemblies change planes, provide isometric or clearly
detailed drawing depicting how components interconnect.

C. Samples: For each expansion joint cover assembly and for each color and texture specified, full
width by 6 inches long in size.

D. Expansion Joint Cover Assembly Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of the
supplier. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Manufacturer and model number for each expansion joint cover assembly.
2. Expansion joint cover assembly location cross-referenced to Drawings.
3. Nominal, minimum, and maximum joint width.
4. Movement direction.
5. Materials, colors, and finishes.
6. Product options.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Expansion Joint Design Criteria :

1. Type of Movement: Thermal.

a. Minimum Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings.

079513.13 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

2.2 FLOOR EXPANSION JOINT COVERS

A. Center-Plate Floor Joint Cover : Assembly consisting of center plate that slides over metal
frames fixed to sides of joint gaps.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide SJ-200HD


Series by Construction Specialties, Inc., or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Balco, Inc.
b. InPro Corporation (IPC).
c. MM Systems Corporation.

2. Application: Floor to floor.


3. Installation: Recessed.
4. Load Capacity:

a. Concentrated Load: 2000 lb .

5. Cover-Plate Design: Plain.


6. Exposed Metal:

a. Aluminum: Mill.

2.3 WALL EXPANSION JOINT COVERS

A. Metal-Plate Wall Joint Cover : Metal cover plate fixed on one side of joint gap and free to slide
on other.

1. Application: Wall to wall.


2. Exposed Metal:

a. Aluminum: Clear anodic, Class I .

B. Glide-Plate Wall Joint Cover : Assembly consisting of center plate that slides in and out of slots
in metal frames fixed to sides of joint gap.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide AFW-200


Series by Construction Specialties, Inc., or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Balco, Inc.
b. InPro Corporation (IPC).
c. MM Systems Corporation.

2. Application: Wall to wall.


3. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than one hour.
4. Exposed Metal:

a. Aluminum: Mill.

079513.13 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

2.4 CEILING EXPANSION JOINT COVERS

A. Glide-Plate Ceiling Joint Cover : Assembly consisting of center plate that slides in and out of
slots in metal frames fixed to sides of joint gap.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide AFW-200


Series by Construction Specialties, Inc., or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Balco, Inc.
b. InPro Corporation (IPC).
c. MM Systems Corporation.

2. Application: Ceiling to ceiling.


3. Exposed Metal:

a. Aluminum: Mill.

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221 , Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209 , Alloy 6061-T6 for
sheet and plate.

1. Apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum surfaces to be placed in


contact with cementitious materials.

2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Mill finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces where expansion joint cover assemblies will be installed for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Notify Architect where discrepancies occur that will affect proper expansion joint cover
assembly installation and performance.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to expansion joint cover assembly manufacturer's written


instructions.

079513.13 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing expansion
joint cover assemblies. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction
indicated and to provide for secure attachment of expansion joint cover assemblies.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing expansion
joint cover assemblies and materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install expansion joint cover
assemblies.

1. Repair or grout block out as required for continuous frame support using nonmetallic,
shrinkage-resistant grout.
2. Install frames in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces.

a. Shimming is not permitted.

3. Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished surfaces
measured from established lines and levels.
4. Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal design gap due to
ambient temperature at time of installation.
5. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal without
buckling of frames.
6. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 3 inches from
each end and not more than 24 inches o.c.

C. Install with hairline mitered corners where expansion joint cover assemblies change direction or
abut other materials.

D. Terminate exposed ends of expansion joint cover assemblies with field- or factory-fabricated
termination devices.

E. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Coordinate installation of expansion joint cover assembly


materials and associated work so complete assemblies comply with performance requirements.

1. Fire Barriers: Install fire barriers to provide continuous, uninterrupted fire resistance
throughout length of joint, including transitions and field splices.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. When
protective covering is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer's
written instructions.

B. Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections. Where necessary due to heavy
construction traffic, remove and properly store cover plates or seals and install temporary
protection over expansion joint cover assemblies. Reinstall cover plates or seals prior to
Substantial Completion.

079513.13 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

END OF SECTION 079513.13

079513.13 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 081213 - HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hollow-metal frames.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 081416 "Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors installed in hollow-metal frames.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, fire-resistance ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
2. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
3. Details of each different wall opening condition.
4. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
5. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
6. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of


supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.
Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product Test Reports: For each type of frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit
and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded
to jambs and mullions.

081213 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum
4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each unit to permit air
circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based
on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

2.2 INTERIOR FRAMES

A. Construct interior frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication,
hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Heavy-Duty Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. .

1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4.


2. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.
3. Construction: Face welded.
4. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.3 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042
inch thick.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and
as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable
for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of
scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill
phosphatized.

081213 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical,
fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly
identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal
as frames.

1. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per
anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at
bottoms of jambs.
2. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.

3. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers
as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.

C. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised


hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI
A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted hardware.


2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for
preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.

2.6 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer


complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate;
compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

081213 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,
filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed
faces.

B. Drill and tap frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in
place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelites, borrowed
lites, and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or
NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.


b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;
grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.
d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as
necessary to comply with installation tolerances.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,
and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.


4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

081213 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees
from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel
to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Final Adjustments: Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is
warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after
installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

END OF SECTION 081213

081213 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.


2. Factory finishing flush wood doors.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim
for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:

1. Dimensions and locations of blocking.


2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts.
4. Undercuts.
5. Requirements for veneer matching.
6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors.

D. Samples for Verification:

1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200
by 250 mm), for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish,
provide set of three Samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in
finished Work.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.

081416 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during
remainder of construction period.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section.
b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch
span.

2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair
or replacement of defective doors.
3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Eggers Industries.
2. Graham Wood Doors; an Assa Abloy Group company.
3. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.
4. VT Industries, Inc.

2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A,


"Architectural Wood Flush Doors."

1. Provide Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.
2. Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in quality standard and
additional requirements beyond those of quality standard. Comply with those selections
and requirements in addition to quality standard.

081416 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Standard Duty.

C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating
indicated.
2. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by
outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

D. Particleboard-Core Doors:

1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1.


2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as follows:

a. 5-inch top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers.


b. 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.

E. Mineral-Core Doors:

1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced


quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.
2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability
approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as follows:

a. 5-inch top-rail blocking.


b. 5-inch bottom-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have protection plates.
c. 5-inchmidrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.

3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved


screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for
exposed edges.

a. Screw-Holding Capability: 400 lbf per WDMA T.M.-10.

2.3 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors :

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces .


2. Species: Red oak .
3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced) .
4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Pleasing match.
5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match.
6. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each separate
room or area of building.
7. Exposed Vertical Edges: Same species as faces or a compatible species - edge Type A.
8. Core: Particleboard.

081416 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

9. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive
planed before veneering.
10. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Standard Duty.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements
of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.

2.5 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete
fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface
applied, before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be
omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Factory finish doors.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: WDMA TR-4 conversion varnish or WDMA TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.
3. Staining: Match Architect's sample.
4. Sheen: Satin.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.

1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location,
and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

081416 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and
referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80.

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as
indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted
for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and
mortises after fitting and machining.

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8
inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise
indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide1/4 inch from bottom of door
to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.


b. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges.

2. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent
permitted by labeling agency.

D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at


Project site.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements.
Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no
evidence of repair or refinishing.

END OF SECTION 081416

081416 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 085800 - ALUMINUM SLIDING TRANSACTION WINDOW

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes:

1. Aluminum, heavy-duty commercial sliding service window.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer’s technical product data.

B. Shop drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of windows. Include details, elevations
and installation requirement of finish hardware and cleaning.

C. Certification: Provide printed data in sufficient detail to indicate compliance with the contract
documents.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver windows crated to provide protection during transit and job storage.

B. Inspect windows upon delivery for damage. Unless minor defects can be made to meet the
Architect’s specifications and satisfaction, damaged parts shall be removed and replaced.

C. Store windows under cover in dry location.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field measurements: Check opening by accurate field measurement before fabrication. Show
recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delay of work.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. All material and workmanship shall be warranted against defects for a period of one (1) year
from the Date of Substantial Completion.

085800 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide aluminum (DW) series, deluxe sliding service window manufactured by C.R. Laurence
Co., Inc. (800) 421-6144, or approved substitution.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Frames: 4 inch Aluminum frame modules shall be constructed of 6063-T5 extruded aluminum.
Replacement and servicing of glass shall be from the clerk side of the window by means of an
access panel in the top header and shall not require the removal of the frame from the opening.
Window glides shall be top-hung heavy-duty ball bearing slides. Include poly-pile weather
stripping and self-latching handle. Overall frame sizes shall be in accordance with the contract
drawings.

1. Finish: Aluminum shall be clear anodized.

B. Glazing: The glazing shall be 1/4 inch in thickness.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install window in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions and recommendations.


Repair damaged units as directed (if approved by the manufacturer and the architect) or replace
with new units.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Clean frame and glazing surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in
the manufacturer’s instructions. Remove excess glazing sealant compounds, dirt or other
substances.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to
ensure that all the windows do not incur any damage or deterioration, other than normal
weathering, at the time of acceptance.

END OF SECTION 085800

085800 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:

a. Swinging doors.

2. Electrified door hardware.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory
prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for
locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware
with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems.

C. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing
construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing
conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to
provide proper door operation.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Conference participants shall include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant.


2. Incorporate conference decisions into keying schedule after reviewing door hardware
keying system including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Flow of traffic and degree of security required.


b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram.
c. Requirements for key control system.
d. Requirements for access control.
e. Address for delivery of keys.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

087100 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components


and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For electrified door hardware.

1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


2. Include details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security
systems.

C. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer's Architectural


Hardware Consultant. Coordinate door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work
to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of


Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware
schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other
work that is critical in Project construction schedule.
2. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in door
hardware schedule in the Contract Documents.
3. Content: Include the following information:

a. Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door
and frame.
b. Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans
and to door and frame schedule.
c. Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function,
size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product.
d. Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and interfaces with
other building control systems.
e. Fastenings and other installation information.
f. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and designations contained in door
hardware schedule.
g. Mounting locations for door hardware.
h. List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame.

D. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer's Architectural Hardware


Consultant, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying
diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the
Contract Documents.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant.

B. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, for tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located
in accessible routes.

087100 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals.

B. Schedules: Final door hardware and keying schedule.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved
by product manufacturers and of an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during
the course of the Work to consult Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and
keying.

1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity.


2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedule.

B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing


consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and
extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural
Hardware Consultant (AHC) and an Electrified Hardware Consultant (EHC).

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to
Project site.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door
hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners
with each item or package.

C. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.


b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering and use.

2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion unless otherwise
indicated below:

a. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

087100 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer.

1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware
unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that
are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
are acceptable.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated doors are indicated, provide door hardware
complying with NFPA 80 that is listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for
fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or
UL 10C.

B. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing
agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do
not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

D. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with
the DOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design".

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the
wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.
2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:

a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door.


b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 90 degrees, the door
will take at least 5 seconds to move to a position of 12 degrees from the latch.

2.3 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. Provide products for each door that comply with requirements indicated in Part 2 and door
hardware schedule.

1. Door hardware is scheduled in Part 3.

2.4 HINGES

A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on


hollow-metal doors and hollow-metal frames.

087100 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.

B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire
doors, and as follows:

1. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throw.

C. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches unless otherwise indicated.

D. Lock Trim:

1. Levers: Wrought or Forged .


2. Escutcheons (Roses): Wrought or Forged .

E. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with
requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended
to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.

1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by


manufacturer.

F. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Operational Grade 1; stamped steel case with steel or brass
parts; Series 1000.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the


following, NO SUBSTITUTION:
2.

a. Best Access Systems; Stanley Security Solutions, Inc.

2.6 ELECTRIC STRIKES

A. Electric Strikes: BHMA A156.31; Grade 1; with faceplate to suit lock and frame.

2.7 LOCK CYLINDERS

A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel
silver. Provide cylinder and core from same manufacturer of locking devices.

B. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1 permanent cores; face finished to match
lockset.

2.8 KEYING

A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, appendix.
Provide one extra key blank for each lock. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference.

087100 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1. Existing System:

a. Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system.

B. Keys: Nickel silver.

2.9 OPERATING TRIM

A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; stainless steel unless otherwise indicated.

2.10 SURFACE CLOSERS

A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and
latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with
manufacturer's written instructions for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure
to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet
field conditions and requirements for opening force.

2.11 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Wall- and Floor-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16.

2.12 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS

A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050-inch- thick stainless steel;
with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners.

2.13 FABRICATION

A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade
name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rating labels and
as otherwise approved by Architect.

1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.

B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming
method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and
hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware
units and BHMA A156.18.

C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared
for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially
recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not
permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door
hardware unless otherwise indicated.

087100 - 6
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed,
except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for
installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means
of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door
and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.
2. Fire-Rated Applications:

a. Wood or Machine Screws: For the following:

1) Hinges mortised to doors or frames; use threaded-to-the-head wood screws


for wood doors and frames.
2) Strike plates to frames.
3) Closers to doors and frames.

b. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided:

1) Closers to doors and frames.

3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors.

2.14 FINISHES

A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,


temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are


acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor
construction, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring
connections before electrified door hardware installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

087100 - 7
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface-applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames
according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with door and hardware manufacturers' written instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless
otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.


2. Wood Doors: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood
Flush Doors."

B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where
cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be
painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface
protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes
have been completed on substrates involved.

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment
substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than
the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30
inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for
door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

D. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction
period.

1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying schedule.


2. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.

E. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above
accessible ceilings. Verify location with Architect.

1. Configuration: Provide one power supply for each door opening with electrified door
hardware.

F. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door
hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.

087100 - 8
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage
lock bolt.

B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months after date of Substantial Completion,


Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door
hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door
hardware, and electrified door hardware.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and
replacement of door hardware.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware.

3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. Refer to Schedule attached.

END OF SECTION 087100

087100 - 9
HARDWARE SCHEDULE

B - Best Lock Company No Substitutions


L - LCN Door Closers No Substitutions
P - PBB Hinge Company
R - Rockwood Manufacturing Company
V - Von Duprin, Inc No Substitutions

HARDWARE SETS:

SET #1

Phase 1 Doors: 153A, 156A, 186A, 190A-A, 190A-B, 192A

Option A Doors: 105B-A, 108A-A, 108A-B, 109A

3 – Ea. Hinges BB81-4.5” x 4.5” x 652 P

1 – Office Lockset 45H7-A-3M x 626 B

1 – Closer 4040XP-RW/PA x AL x TB L

1 – Kick Plate K1050-10” x D.W.-2” x 630 R

1 – Stop 440 x 626 R

3 – Silencers 608 R

SET #2

Phase 1 Doors: 153A-A, 153 B-A, 153C-A, 190B-A, 192A-A, 192B-A

Option A Doors: 101A-A, 101B-A, 103A-A, 103B-A, 105A-A, 107A-A,107B-A, 108B-A, 108C-A,

108D-A, 108E-A, 109B, 109A-A, 109B-A, 111A-A, 111B-A, 111C-A

3 – Ea. Hinges BB81-4.5” x 4.5” x 652 P

1 – Office Lockset 45H7-D-3M x 626 B

1 – Stop 440 x 626 R

3 – Silencers 680 R

1
SET #3

Phase 1 Door: 155

1 – Drop Letter Box 620B26D I

1 – Sleeve 601 I

1 – Auto Opener 4642 x AL L

2 – Actuators 8310-853 L

1 – Electric 6210 x 630 V

1 – Power Supply PS902 V

SET #4

Phase 1 Door: 191A

Phase 2 Door: 106A

3 – Ea. Hinges BB81-4.5” x 4.5” x 652 P

1 – Storeroom Lockset 45H7-D-3M x 626 B

1 – Closer 4040XP-RW/PA x AL x TB L

1 – Kick Plate K1050-10” x D.W.-2” x 630 R

1 – Stop 440 x 626 R

3 – Silencers 608 R

SET #5

Option A Doors: 103A, 103B, 107A

3 – Ea. Hinges BB81-4.5” x 4.5” x 652 P

1 – Office Lockset 45H7-A-3M x 626 B

1 – Auto Opener 4642 x AL L

2
2 – Actuators 8310-853 L

1 – Kick Plate K1050-10” x D.W.-2” x 630 R

1 – Stop 440 x 626 R

3 – Silencers 608 R

1 – Electric Strike 6211 x 630 V

1 – Power Supply PS902 V

Note: 1. Auto opener activated by push button

2. Electric strike release for auto opener

SET #6

Phase 1 Door: 190A-B

3 – Ea. Hinges BB81-4.5” x 4.5” x 652 P

1 – Storeroom Lockset 45H7-D3M x 626 B

1 – Closer 4040XP-RW/PA x AL x TB L

1 – Kick Plate K1050-10” x D.W.-2” x 630 R

1 – Stop 440 x 626 R

3 – Silencers 608 R

1 – Electric Strike 6211 x 630 V

1 – Power Supply PS902 V

1 – Push Button 660PB SCE

Note: Push button at remote station, releases door

3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 090690 - COLOR SCHEDULE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. This section covers only the color of the exterior and interior materials and products that are
exposed to view in the finished construction. The word "color", as used herein, includes
surface color and pattern. Requirements for quality and method of installation are covered in
other appropriate sections of the specifications. Specific locations where the various materials
are required are shown on the drawings. Items not designated for color in this section may be
specified in other sections. When color is not designated for items, the Contractor shall
propose a color for approval.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

1. Color Schedule: Three sets of color boards, 30 days after the Contractor is given Notice
to proceed, complying with the following requirements:

a. Color boards shall reflect all actual finish textures, patterns, and colors required for
this contract.
b. Materials shall be labeled with the finish type, manufacturer's name, pattern, and
color reference.
c. Samples shall be on size 8-1/2 by 11 inch boards with a maximum spread of size
25-1/2 by 33 inches for foldouts.
d. Samples for this color board are required in addition to samples requested in other
specification sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COLOR SCHEDULE

A. The color schedule information provided in the following paragraphs lists the colors, patterns
and textures required for exterior and interior finishes, including both factory applied and field
applied colors. Where color is shown as being specific to one manufacturer, an equivalent color
by another manufacturer may be submitted for approval. Manufacturers and materials
specified are not intended to limit the selection of equal colors from other manufacturers. In
the case of difference between the drawings and specifications, colors identified in this
specification govern.

090690 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

2.2 INTERIOR FINISHES

A. Interior Floor Finishes

1. Provide flooring materials to match the colors listed below.

a. Carpet Tile:

1) CPT1: Interface, 1465202500 To Scale, 7772 Blueprint, 19.625” x 19.625”


2) CPT2: Interface, 146500250H Viva Colores, 101171 Cano, 19.625” x
19.625”
3) CPT3: Interface, 146500250H Viva Colores, 101131 Salvia, 19.625” x
19.625”
4) CPT4: Interface, 146500250H Viva Colores, 101169 Marengo, 19.625” x
19.625”
5) CPT5: Interface, 146500250H Viva Colores, 101167 Castano, 19.625” x
19.625”

B. Interior Base Finishes

1. Provide base materials to match the colors listed below.

a. Resilient Base and Moldings:

1) RB1: Johnsonite, Resilient Wall Base, 6” High Traditional, Standard Toe,


283 Toast

C. Interior Wall Finishes

1. Apply interior wall color to the entire wall surface, including reveals, vertical furred
spaces and columns. Paint items not specified in other paragraphs to match adjacent
wall surface. Provide wall materials to match the colors listed below.

a. Paint:

1) PT1: Sherwin Williams, Interior Latex Paint: Eggshell, SW 6078 Realistic


Beige

D. Interior Ceiling Finishes

1. Apply ceiling colors to ceiling surfaces including soffits, furred down areas. Provide
ceiling materials to match the colors listed below.

a. Acoustical Tile:

1) ACT1: Armstrong, Ultima, White, 24” x 24”

b. Acoustical Tile Grid:

090690 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1) White

c. Paint (Exterior Window Furr Downs):

1) PT1: Sherwin Williams, Interior Latex Paint: Eggshell, SW 6078 Realistic


Beige

E. Interior Trim

1. Provide interior trim to match the colors listed below.

a. Steel Door Frames:

1) PT2: Sherwin Williams, DTM Acrylic Coating: Semi-gloss, SW 6078


Realistic Beige

b. Aluminum Transaction Windows:

1) Clear Anodized

c. Wood Doors:

1) Red Oak

d. Wood Door Stain:

1) To match PLAM1

F. Interior Miscellaneous

1. Provide miscellaneous items to match the colors listed below.

a. Countertops

1) Solid Surface Material: SS1: Corian, Savannah


2) Plastic Laminate: PLAM2:

b. Architectural Cabinets:

1) Plastic Laminate: PLAM1: Pionite, High Pressure Laminate, WW561, Spice


Walnut

c. Wall Switch Handles and Standard Receptacle Bodies:

1) To match building standard

d. Electrical Device Cover Plates:

1) To match building standard

e. Telecommunication Device Cover Plates:

090690 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1) To match building standard

PART 3 - EXECUTION

1. (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION 090690

090690 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate


non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 , hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise
indicated.

B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or embossed steel studs
and runners.

1. Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch .


b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following:

1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes
applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in
thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

092216 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

D. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch .


2. Depth: 7/8 inch .

E. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound
transmission.

1. Configuration: hat shaped.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,
and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal
frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply
to framing installation.

B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely
fastened.

C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy
trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

092216 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.


2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to
terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above
ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install
runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.


b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished
assembly.
c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead
structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required
for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to
match framing required above door heads.
4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.

E. Direct Furring:

1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,
or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

END OF SECTION 092216

092216 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Interior gypsum board.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural steel framing and
suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack
panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.

1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board


manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

092900 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and


construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and
that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch .


2. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced


galvanized-steel sheet .
2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead.
b. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
c. Expansion (control) joint.

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible
with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

092900 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,
use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

C. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant


complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through
perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance
of the Work.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

C. Locate edge and end joints over supports. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends.
Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control
joints at corners of framed openings.

D. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

092900 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

E. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,
etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof
slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow
1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.

F. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural


abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge
trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural
surfaces with acoustical sealant.

G. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to
open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

H. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Type X: Vertical surfaces.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise


indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of panels.

2. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application:

1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer
joints unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger
joints on opposite sides of partitions.
2. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers with screws; fasten face layers with adhesive and
supplementary fasteners.

092900 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Architect for visual effect.

B. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated.


2. L-Bead: Use where indicated.

3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for
decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as
not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.


2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior
Painting."

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other
non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall
application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION 092900

092900 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for interior ceilings.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches in size.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension-system members.


2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.
3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.

a. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment
devices whose installation is specified in other Sections.

4. Carrying channels or other supplemental support for hanger-wire attachment where


conditions do not permit installation of hanger wires at required spacing.
5. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels.
6. Items penetrating finished ceiling and ceiling-mounted items including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Diffusers.
c. Grilles.
d. Speakers.
e. Sprinklers.

7. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot .

B. Field quality-control reports.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.

095113 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site and
store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage
from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and
other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content for a period of 7 days..

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed
and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project
when occupied for its intended use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and its supporting suspension
system from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing


agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264.


2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS

A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels according to ASTM E 1264
and designated by type, form, pattern, acoustical rating, and light reflectance unless otherwise
indicated.

095113 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated panels as follows:

1. Type and Form: Type IV, mineral base with membrane-faced overlay; Form 2, water
felted; with vinyl overlay on face.
2. Pattern: E (lightly textured) .

C. Color: White.

D. Light Reflectance (LR): Not less than 0.90 .

E. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): Not less than 35 .

F. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than 0.70 .

G. Edge/Joint Detail: Square.

H. Thickness: 3/4 inch .

I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches .

J. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard broad spectrum, antimicrobial formulation


that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing
no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273, ASTM D 3274,
or ASTM G 21 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.

2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal


suspension system and accessories according to ASTM C 635/C 635M and designated by type,
structural classification, and finish indicated.

B. Wide-Face, Aluminum-Capped, Double-Web, Fire-Rated, Hot-Dip Galvanized, G60 , Steel


Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; hot-dip
galvanized, G60 coating designation; with prefinished, 15/16-inch- wide aluminum caps on
flanges.

1. Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty system.


2. Face Design: Flat, flush.
3. Cap Finish: Painted white.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M,
Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

095113 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops
for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a
load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 488/E 488M or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a
qualified testing and inspecting agency.

a. Type: Postinstalled expansion anchors.


b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated according to
ASTM B 633, Class SC 1 (mild) service condition.

2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application


indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory
devices for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by
testing according to ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting
agency.

B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires as follows:

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
2. Size: Wire diameter sufficient for its stress at three times hanger design load
(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but
not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire.

C. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

D. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch- thick,
galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with
bolted connections and 5/16-inch- diameter bolts.

2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not
indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with
seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as
that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.

1. Edge moldings shall fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated
and match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated.
2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter
required to fit penetration exactly.

095113 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical
panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified
in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel
ceilings.

B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture
damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless
otherwise indicated, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M and manufacturer's written
instructions.

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard
suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Do not attach to other suspended building
systems.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly to structure or to inserts, eye
screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not
deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or
power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.
6. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required,
install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

095113 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.


8. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from
hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of
each member.
9. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced standards.

C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of


moldings before they are installed.
2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more
than 3 inches from ends. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

D. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide precise
fit.

1. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed
panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel
manufacturer.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Suspended Ceilings: Install main and cross runners level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet,
non-cumulative.

B. Moldings and Trim: Install moldings and trim to substrate and level with ceiling suspension
system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, non-cumulative.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
touchup of minor finish damage.

B. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to
permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

END OF SECTION 095113

095113 - 6
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Resilient base.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and
pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long.

1.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each
type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following
time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation.


2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range
recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

096513 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE

A. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid,
homogeneous).

1. Style and Location:

a. Style B, Cove: .

B. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

C. Height: 6 inches.

D. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length .

E. Outside Corners: Job formed.

F. Inside Corners: Job formed.

G. Colors: As indicated in Section 090690 Color Schedule.

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or


blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product
manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient


products and substrate conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified
in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

096513 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of


resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to
ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and
that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale
recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 10 pH.
4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according
to manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following:

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed


with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate
of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170.
Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative
humidity level.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are
to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation


materials into spaces where they will be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient
products.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.

096513 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with
returns not less than 3 inches in length.

a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns
not less than 3 inches in length.

a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

END OF SECTION 096513

096513 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes modular carpet tile.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories
installed with carpet tile.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade


resistance.
2. Include manufacturer's written installation recommendations for each type of substrate.

B. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each
Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation
indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and
procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

096813 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated,
but not less than 10 sq. yd..

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard."

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" for temperature, humidity, and
ventilation limitations.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the
construction period.

C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to
bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile
manufacturer.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of
carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic,
failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.
2. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. More than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, and runs.


b. Loss of tuft-bind strength.
c. Loss of face fiber.
d. Delamination.

3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET TILE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide carpet tile indicated in


Section 090690 Color Schedule.

096813 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based


formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

B. Adhesive Tabs: Flexible polyethylene carrier of with rayon scrim and acrylic polymer
adhesive surface.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide FlexLok tabs


by Mohawk Group (The); Mohawk Carpet, LLC, or comparable product by another
manufacturer.

C. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of profile and width shown,
of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize
running joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting carpet tile performance.

B. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

C. Concrete Slabs: Verify that finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 033000
"Cast-in-Place Concrete" and that surfaces are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits.

1. Clean floors without addition of water, if possible. If necessary, remove fine dust by
damp mopping floors, but allow a minimum of 3 days between mopping and flooring
installation.
2. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 1000 sq. ft., and
perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly
spaced in installation areas.

a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only
after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000
sq. ft. in 24 hours.
b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with
installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity
level measurement.
c. Perform additional moisture tests recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet
tile manufacturers. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

096813 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standards" and with carpet tile
manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive
carpet tile.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written


instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks,
holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more
stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that
are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using
solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile
manufacturers.

D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard," Section 18, "Modular Carpet"
and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.

1. Layout carpet tile grid to locate tile intersections for installation of adhesive tabs.

B. Installation Method: Adhesive tabs.

1. Place an adhesive tab under each corner of the starting tile, leaving3/4 of tab exposed.
Place succeeding tiles against previous tile, pressing tile into adhesive tabs, and adding
tabs at corners of each tile. Each tile shall have each corner attached with an adhesive
tab.

C. Maintain dye-lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.

D. Maintain pile-direction patterns recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

E. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in
furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut
edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

F. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on carpet tile as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.

H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. Install carpet tiles quarter turned.

096813 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.


2. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard,"
Section 20, "Protecting Indoor Installations."

C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment
and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 096813

096813 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
interior substrates:

1. Steel and iron.


2. Gypsum board.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.

1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category
specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.


2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

1.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.


2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

099123 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5
deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Kelly-Moore Paint Company Inc.


2. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its
"MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and
substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule .

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:

1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

099123 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing
finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural


Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are
not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop
paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to
comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI


Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture
with prime coat only.
3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed
or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

099123 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of
same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or


defaced painted surfaces.

3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Steel Substrates:

1. Latex over Shop-Applied Quick-Drying Shop Primer System MPI INT 5.1X:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for shop application.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.

B. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Latex over Latex Sealer System MPI INT 9.2A:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50.


b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #52.

END OF SECTION 099123

099123 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 123623.13 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes plastic-laminate countertops.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product, high-pressure decorative laminate.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.

C. Samples for Verification:

1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.

B. Product Certificates: For the following:

1. High-pressure decorative laminate.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful
in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Do not deliver countertops until painting and similar operations that could damage countertops
have been completed in installation areas. If countertops must be stored in other than
installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements
specified in "Field Conditions" Article.

123623.13 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and
90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the
construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Established Dimensions: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, establish
dimensions for areas where countertops are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and
coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for grades indicated for construction, installation, and other requirements.

1. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard
and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those
selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.

B. Grade: Premium.

C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS.

D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces as indicated in Section 090690 Color Schedule.

E. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.

F. Core Material: Medium-density fiberboard.

G. Core Thickness: 3/4 inch.

1. Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches at front, back, and ends with additional
layers of core material laminated to top.

H. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL, on underside
of countertop substrate.

123623.13 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

2.2 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality
standard unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.

B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of
referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless
otherwise indicated.

1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch OD, brown, molded-plastic
grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. Provide 1 grommet in
countertop in Secur 190C, east of transaction window.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be


incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Doug Mockett & Company, Inc.; SG Series.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement.

1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Provide front and end
overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:

1. Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to


Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where
necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

C. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive appliances, plumbing fixtures,
electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in
diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove
splinters and burrs.

1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

123623.13 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions in


installation areas.

B. Before installing countertops, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work
as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed.

B. Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not
completed in the shop.

C. Install countertops level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

D. Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged
finish at cuts.

E. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop.

1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation
from a straight line.
2. Secure backsplashes to walls with adhesive.
3. Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with permanently elastic sealing compound
recommended by countertop material manufacturer.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged and defective countertops, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.

B. Clean countertops on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to


restore damaged or soiled areas.

END OF SECTION 123623.13

123623.13 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 123661.16 - SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Solid surface material countertops.


2. Solid surface material backsplashes.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For countertop materials.

B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles,
methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

1. Show locations and details of joints.


2. Show direction of directional pattern, if any.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Countertop material, 6 inches square.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For solid surface material countertops to include in maintenance manuals.
Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names,
addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate countertops
similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful
in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of countertops.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base


cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete.

123661.16 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS

A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous-filled plastic resin complying with ICPA SS-1.

1. Type: Provide Standard type unless Special Purpose type is indicated.


2. Colors and Patterns: As indicated in Section 090690 Color Schedule.

2.2 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION

A. Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions


and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

1. Grade: Custom .

B. Configuration:

1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top.


2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner.

C. Countertops: 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same
material.

D. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material.

E. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid surface
material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

1. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly.

F. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Adhesive: Product recommended by solid surface material manufacturer.

B. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint
Sealants."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates to receive solid surface material countertops and conditions under which
countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops.

123661.16 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet, 1/4 inch maximum. Do not exceed
1/64-inch difference between planes of adjacent units.

B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of
countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces
and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's
written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire
surface.

C. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into cornerblocks of base cabinets.
Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane.

D. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to solid surface material manufacturer's
written instructions. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop,
form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth,
remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

E. Install backsplashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of
countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.

F. Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and
splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Fasten by screwing through backing.
Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer.

G. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

END OF SECTION 123661.16

123661.16 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 211313 - WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.


2. Sprinklers.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at
working pressure of 175-psig maximum.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Wet Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and
that is connected to water supply. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they
are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished


specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.


2. Provide hydraulic calculations, based on flow test data performed less than 1 year prior to
calculations. If current flow test data is not available, perform flow test on which to base
hydraulic calculations.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Modifications to the existing wet pipe sprinkler system shall be designed and installed in
accordance with NFPA 13 and). All new piping shall be schedule 40 pipe.

B. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working


pressure.

C. Sprinkler densities and areas shall be in accordance with the following and NFPA 13:

211313 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1. Refer to sprinkler design schedule on drawings.

a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.

b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.

c. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.

2. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: In accordance with NFPA 13, but not
exceeding 225 sq. ft.

3. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13 unless


otherwise indicated.

a. Light-Hazard Occupancies: 100 gpm for 30 minutes.


b. Ordinary-Hazard Occupancies: 250 gpm for 60 minutes.

D. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that
have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if
applicable. Submit to AHJ after approval by Architect/Engineer.

E. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

F. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and
Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems and specialties to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with
space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of
sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with
sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems.


Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.

211313 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

2. Sprinkler system designer shall be NICET Level III.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to 2010 ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.

1.9 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For all types of products provided. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings and Hydraulic Calculations: For wet pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans,
details, and attachments to other work.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

D. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that
have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations.

E. Welding certificates.

F. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

G. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and
Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."

H. Field quality-control reports.

I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler equipment to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.

J. Copy of NFPA 25

1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compliance with referenced NFPA standards is mandatory. This includes advisory provisions
listed in the appendices of such standards, as though the word "shall" had been substituted for
the word "should" wherever it appears. In the event of a conflict between specific provisions of
this specification and applicable NFPA standards, this specification shall govern.

B. Installer

1. Work specified in this section shall be performed by the Sprinkler System Installer who is
regularly engaged in the installation of the type and complexity of system specified in the
contract documents, and who has served in a similar capacity for at least three systems
that have performed in the manner intended for a period of not less than 6 months.
Submit the name and documentation of certification of the proposed Sprinkler System
Installer.

211313 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

C. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems
Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.
2. Installer: NICET Level III.

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

F. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and


testing shall comply with the following:

1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."

1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities


occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of sprinkler
service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Owner's written permission.

1.12 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings,
including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

1.13 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

211313 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1.14 Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with space
for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers
required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and
wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with
the following:

1. NFPA 13.

B. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Schedule 40 , Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B. Pipe ends may be
factory or field formed to match joining method.

B. Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard-weight,
seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.

C. Uncoated-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865/A 865M, threaded.

D. Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

E. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.

F. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.

G. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.

H. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.

I. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:

1. Pressure Rating: 175-psig minimum.


2. Painted or Uncoated Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M,
malleable-iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting, with dimensions matching
steel pipe.
3. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213 rigid pattern,
unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections,
EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.

211313 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME
B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials
appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Branch Outlet Fittings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:

a. Match existing.

B. Flexible Sprinkler Hose Fittings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:

a. Fivalco Inc.
b. FlexHead Industries, Inc.
c. Gateway Tubing, Inc.

2. Standard: UL 1474.
3. Type: Flexible hose for connection to sprinkler, and with bracket for connection to
ceiling grid.
4. Pressure Rating: 175-psig minimum.
5. Size: Same as connected piping, for sprinkler.

2.5 SPRINKLERS

A. General Requirements:

1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide,"


published by FM Global, listing.
2. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig minimum.
3. Sprinkler pendent placement shall be carefully coordinated with all other trades. All
sprinklers installed in ceiling tile shall be symmetrically placed. Provide architecturally
coordinated, single piece sprinkler trim rings in all occupied spaces.

B. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:

211313 - 6
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199.


2. Characteristics: Field verify to match existing.
3. Sprinkler Finishes: Field verify to match existing.

C. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Field verify to match existing.

D. Replace all existing sprinklers in project area.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system
design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Report test results promptly and in writing.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated on approved working plans.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from
approved working plans.

B. Piping Standard: Comply with NFPA 13 requirements for installation of sprinkler piping.

C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in
pipe sizes.

D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

E. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and
equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

F. Paint sprinkler piping in finish areas a facility coordinated color, approved by


Architect/Engineer. All piping shall have identification and flow marking at each side of walls
and maximum 26 feet intervals.

G. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with
requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.

H. Pressurize and check sprinkler system piping and flush.

I. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.

211313 - 7
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

J. Install sleeves and sleeve seals for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Provide
firestopping for penetrations through fire or smoke rated walls and floors.

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings
that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for
aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and
equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water
service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.


2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged.

H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes
and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for
galvanized-steel pipe.

I. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA
C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and
grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.

J. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to


AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe
and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.

K. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both
piping systems.

211313 - 8
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3.4 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels +/- 6 inches.

B. Replace all existing sprinklers in project area.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA
13.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections: Wet Pipe Sprinkler Systems shall be acceptance tested in accordance
with NFPA 13 Requirements. All test results shall be recorded on the attached Contractor's
Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping.

1. Testing.

a. New fire suppression system piping shall be hydrostatically tested at a minimum


pressure of 200 psi or 50 psi in excess of the system working pressure, whichever
is greater. Test shall be performed on piping back to the nearest existing control
valve.
b. Test existing waterflow switch serving the project to confirm its operation and
document time delay.
c. Perform main drain test and record.

2. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"
Chapter.

3. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.

4. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.

5. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.

6. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department equipment.

C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

211313 - 9
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain suppression system and
all associated components.

3.9 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Standard-pressure, wet pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings;
and threaded joints.
2. Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray-iron threaded
fittings; and threaded joints.
3. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with cut- or roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end
fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.
4. Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized, grooved-end
fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

B. Standard-pressure, wet pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the
following:

1. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings;
and threaded joints.
2. Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray-iron threaded
fittings; and threaded joints.
3. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with cut- or roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end
fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.
4. Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized, grooved-end
fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

3.10 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE

A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:

1. Rooms without Ceilings: Match existing.


2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Match existing.

B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.

1. Concealed Sprinklers:
2. Pendent Sprinklers: .finished spaces exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces
not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive
fumes.

END OF SECTION 211313

211313 - 10
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.


2. Equipment supports.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.


2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
3. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to
support bearing surface of piping.
4. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

2.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural


carbon-steel shapes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building
structure.

230529 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,
washers, and other accessories.

C. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

D. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

E. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install
additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS
2-1/2and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is
placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

F. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

G. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

H. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services
piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
3. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.

4. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support


equipment above floor.

B. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for equipment supports.

230529 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;
appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the
following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and
equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal framing systems and attachments for
general service applications.

END OF SECTION 230529

230529 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Equipment labels.
2. Pipe labels.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification
material and device.

B. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed
content for each label. Only equipment with missing labels are to be given new labels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,
1/8 inch thick.
2. Letter Color: White.
3. Background Color: Red.
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

2.2 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1.

230553 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of


surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. For equipment with missing labels - install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of
mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

B. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including
pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.

C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Heating Water Piping: White letters on a safety-green background.

END OF SECTION 230553

230553 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Induction-unit systems.

2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:

a. Variable-flow hydronic systems.

3. Testing, adjusting, and balancing existing systems and equipment.


4. Duct leakage tests.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. BAS: Building automation systems.

C. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

D. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

E. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

F. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work.

G. TDH: Total dynamic head.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Certified TAB reports.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by NEBB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB.
2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB as a TAB
technician.

230593 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB
period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TAB SPECIALISTS

A. Testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be performed by a third party unaffiliated with the
mechanical contractor.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer
wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify
that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for intended purpose and are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions
for environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to
verify that they are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum
walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.

F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,
cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

I. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight,
filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible
and their controls are connected and functioning.

230593 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens have been replaced by permanent screens with
indicated perforations.

L. Examine control valves for proper installation for their intended function of throttling,
diverting, or mixing fluid flows.

M. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

N. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

O. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes the following:

1. Equipment and systems to be tested.


2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems.
3. Instrumentation to be used.
4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment.

B. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system readiness
for TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following:

1. Airside:

a. Verify that leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
b. Duct systems are complete with terminals installed.
c. Volume, smoke, and fire dampers are open and functional.
d. Clean filters are installed.
e. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction.
f. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
g. Ceilings are installed.
h. Windows and doors are installed.
i. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.

2. Hydronics:

a. Verify leakage and pressure tests on water distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
b. Piping is complete with terminals installed.
c. Systems are flushed, filled, and air purged.
d. Strainers are pulled and cleaned.
e. Control valves are functioning per the sequence of operation.
f. Shutoff and balance valves have been verified to be 100 percent open.
g. Pumps are started and proper rotation is verified.
h. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.

230593 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of
Environmental Systems" and in this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with
requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."
2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,
coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation,"
Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation," and Section 230719 "HVAC Piping
Insulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position
indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other
suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.5 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Cross-check the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

D. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR INDUCTION-UNIT SYSTEMS

A. Adjust each induction unit.

B. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed
by fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.

a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates
minimum outdoor-air conditions.
b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary,
perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow.
c. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil
traverse may be acceptable.

230593 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

d. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow at


terminals and calculate the total airflow.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows:

a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
b. Report artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured.

3. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor
amperage to ensure that no overload occurs. Measure amperage in full-cooling,
full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum
required brake horsepower.

C. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows.

1. Adjust submain and branch duct volume dampers for specified airflow.

D. Verify final system conditions.

1. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design.


2. Re-measure all final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile.
3. Mark all final settings.
4. Measure and record all operating data.
5. Record final fan-performance data.

3.7 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

B. In addition to requirements in "Preparation" Article, prepare hydronic systems for testing and
balancing as follows:

1. Check flow-control valves for proper position.


2. Check that air has been purged from the system.

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at
maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals, and proceed as specified above for hydronic
systems.

3.9 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTS

A. New downstream ductwork only - witness the duct pressure testing performed by Installer.

B. Verify that proper test methods are used and that leakage rates are within specified tolerances.

230593 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

C. Report deficiencies observed.

3.10 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS

A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.

1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan.
2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate
information.
3. Check the condition of filters.
4. Check the condition of coils.
5. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements
taken. Report deficiencies.

B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is
to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished.
Verify the following:

1. New filters are installed.


2. Coils are clean and fins combed.
3. Fans are clean.
4. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.

C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are
affected by the renovation work.

1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and
determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils.
2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face
velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment
manufacturer.
3. If calculations increase or decrease the airflow rates and water flow rates by more than 5
percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or
decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.
4. Balance each air outlet.

3.11 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.


2. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.

B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified
above.

230593 - 6
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3.12 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections
for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the
certified testing and balancing engineer.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.


2. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and
Product Data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Project name.
2. Project location.
3. Report date.
4. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
5. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
6. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.


b. Notable characteristics of systems.

7. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.

D. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

1. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Airflow rate in cfm.


b. Final airflow rate in cfm.

END OF SECTION 230593

230593 - 7
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.


2. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor
permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an


apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor,
Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing


identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes,
and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed


index of 50 or less.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate


ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section
230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

230713 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before
preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for
installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for
maintenance.

1.6 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have
satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum
Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule"
articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.

F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK
jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Johns Manville; Microlite EQ.


b. Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap.
c. Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

230713 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for
bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be


incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller


Company; CP-82.
b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 85-50.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.3 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be


incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller


Company; 30-03/11-90.
b. Vimasco Corporation; 749.

2.4 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When


factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;


complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

2.5 TAPES

A. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic
adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be


incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

230713 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK.


b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827.
c. Compac Corporation; 110 and 111.
d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.

2.6 CORNER ANGLES

A. Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel
according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.

B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for
each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

230713 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.


2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure.
Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.

J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.


2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive
self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written
instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches
similar to butt joints.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

230713 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at


fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper
sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" and


fire-resistive joint sealers.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation
pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,
for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous
unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with
insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment.
Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch
o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive,
vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain


vapor-barrier seal.

4. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section
for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually
mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

3.6 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and
supports to maintain a continuous fire rating.

B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.

C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systems are


specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.7 FINISHES

A. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.

3.8 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

230713 - 6
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.


2. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space.

B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Indoor, exposed supply ducts in conditioned space.

3.9 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

B. Concealed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

C. Concealed, rectangular, return-air duct insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Board Internal Liner: 1-1/2 inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

END OF SECTION 230713

230713 - 7
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems:

1. Heating hot-water piping, indoors.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 230713 "Duct Insulation."

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor
permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any).

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an


apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor,
Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing


identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive,
mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed


index of 50 or less.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate


ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section
230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

230719 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application.
Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for
installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for
maintenance.

1.6 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have
satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation
Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground
Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.

F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type II with factory-applied vinyl
jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be


incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

230719 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller


Company; CP-127.
b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 85-60/85-70.

2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.3 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.

2.4 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:

1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass, Phenolic, and Polyisocyanurate Products: Subject to


compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller


Company; CP-76.
b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 405.
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 30-45.
d. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.

2. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.5 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by
10 strands/sq. in. for covering pipe and pipe fittings.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be


incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller


Company; Chil-Glas Number 10.

230719 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10
strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for pipe.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be


incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller


Company; Mast-A-Fab.
b. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a
corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:

1. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300
deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating
materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

B. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

230719 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.


2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure.
Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.


2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written
instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.

230719 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches
similar to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

B. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation


continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping


and fire-resistive joint sealers.

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from
same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and
irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour
that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit.
Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,
valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.

230719 - 6
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for
above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric
and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and
unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation
facing using PVC tape.
9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match
size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,
test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape
insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating
cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with
stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and
jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide
the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe
insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied
in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.

230719 - 7
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with
outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections
of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation
materials with wire or bands.

C. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to
valve body.
3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.

3.7 FINISHES

A. Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with
paint system identified below and as specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and
Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.

C. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.

3.8 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for
each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

3.9 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and Below:

1. NPS 12 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:

230719 - 8
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1 1/2 inches thick.

END OF SECTION 230719

230719 - 9
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes pipe and fitting materials and joining methods for the following:

1. Hot-water heating piping.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX.

1. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and
installation.
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following
minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated:

1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: 150 psig at 200 deg F.

2.2 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate
for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

B. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working
temperatures and pressures.

2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating
nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:

232113 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:

a. A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co.


b. Capitol Manufacturing Company.
c. Watts Regulator Co.
d. Zurn Industries, LLC; AquaSpec Commercial Faucet Products.

2. Description:

a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Schedule 40, Grade B, Type 96 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron
flanges and flange fittings; and threaded joints.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination
Drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

232113 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.

K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing
of valves.

L. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

M. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

N. Install branch connections to mains using mechanically formed tee fittings in main pipe, with
the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to
the top of the main pipe.

O. Install valves according to Section 230523.11 "Globe Valves for HVAC Piping," Section
230523.12 "Ball Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.13 "Butterfly Valves for HVAC
Piping," Section 230523.14 "Check Valves for HVAC Piping," and Section 230523.15 "Gate
Valves for HVAC Piping."

P. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

Q. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere
as indicated.

R. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

S. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment"
for identifying piping.

T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements
for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

U. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with
requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC
Piping."

3.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and
Equipment" for hanger, support, and anchor devices. Comply with the following requirements
for maximum spacing of supports.

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long.
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or
longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,
supported on a trapeze.

232113 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.


5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with
copper pipe.
6. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from
scratching pipe.

C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet.


2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet.
3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet.

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes
and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

E. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

3.5 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment
connections.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

232113 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the
system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any
vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to
pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum
yield strength or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building
Services Piping."
2. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping,
joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing
components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
3. Prepare written report of testing.

C. Perform the following before operating the system:

1. Open manual valves fully.


2. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating
freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).
3. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.

END OF SECTION 232113

232113 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.


2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings.
3. Sheet metal materials.
4. Duct liner.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and
balancing requirements for metal ducts.
2. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices,
duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Sealants and gaskets.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes.
2. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
3. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and
panels.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction


Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise
indicated.

233113 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse
Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved,
duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal
Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved,
duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types
and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable
sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction


Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on
indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams,"
for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support
intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."

2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction


Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct
construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting,
seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum
ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

233113 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

2.4 DUCT LINER (RETURN AIR TRANSFERS ONLY)

A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with
NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:

a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.


b. Knauf Insulation.
c. Owens Corning.

2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and
gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index
of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.


2. Water resistant.
3. Mold and mildew resistant.
4. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).
5. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.
6. Service: Indoor or outdoor.
7. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless
steel, or aluminum sheets.

2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2,
"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct
system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and
calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.
Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings
and Coordination Drawings.

233113 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

D. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for
branch connections.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines.

F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.

G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

H. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and
enclosures.

I. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed
to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal
flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2
inches.

J. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers.
Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke
dampers.

K. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials.
Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction,"
Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use
two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When
welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds,
and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings,
hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these
requirements.

233113 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3.3 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct
Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."

3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter
5, "Hangers and Supports."

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air
Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.
2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness according
to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC
Systems."

3.7 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new and existing duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if
required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch
insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Section
233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.

C. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).


2. Coils and related components.
3. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.

233113 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3.8 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
for HVAC."

3.9 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Supply Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units :

a. Pressure Class: Positive 1-inch wg.


b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C.

B. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -


Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct


Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane
Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."

a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with


SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table
3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have
proportionately fewer segments.

1) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5 unless space does not allow.

C. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -


Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.


b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: conical tap.

END OF SECTION 233113

233113 - 6
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Manual volume dampers.


2. Fire dampers.
3. Turning vanes.
4. Duct-mounted access doors.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Flexible ducts.
7. Duct accessory hardware.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.


2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2
finish for concealed ducts.

C. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for
concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

233300 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

D. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on


galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:

a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.


b. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
c. McGill AirFlow LLC.
d. Nailor Industries Inc.
e. Ruskin Company.

2. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

B. Jackshaft:

1. Size: 0.5-inch diameter.


2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on
supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.
3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in
multiple-damper assembly.

C. Damper Hardware:

1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick zinc-plated steel,
and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.
2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.
3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.4 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Greenheck Fan Corporation.


2. Nailor Industries Inc.
3. Ruskin Company.

B. Type: Static; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.

233300 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

C. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours.

D. Frame: Curtain type with blades inside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thick
galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.39 inch thick, as indicated, and of length to suit application.
2. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must
comply with sleeve requirements.

F. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

G. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.

H. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links.

2.5 TURNING VANES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Duro Dyne Inc.


2. METALAIRE, Inc.
3. SEMCO Incorporated.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support
with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

D. Vane Construction: Double wall.

2.6 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.


2. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
3. Elgen Manufacturing.
4. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
5. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
6. Nailor Industries Inc.

233300 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels,"
and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."

1. Door:

a. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct
pressure class.

C. Pressure Relief Access Door:

1. Factory set at 3.0- to 8.0-inch wg.

2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.


2. Duro Dyne Inc.
3. Elgen Manufacturing.
4. Ventfabrics, Inc.
5. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..

2.8 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.


2. McGill AirFlow LLC.
3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Noninsulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate supported
by helically wound, spring-steel wire.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.

233300 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct


Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous
Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in
galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and
aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend
from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with
hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

D. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

E. Install fire dampers according to UL listing.

F. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining
accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.
Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure
relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream
from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.
2. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing.

G. Label access doors according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

H. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

I. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with maximum 3 ft. length of flexible duct.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.


2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be
performed.
3. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.

END OF SECTION 233300

233300 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 233600 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Induction air terminal units.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. There are no new terminal units to be installed. Relocation of some existing units will be
required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TERMINAL UNIT INSTALLATION

A. Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

B. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and
maintenance.

C. Install wall-mounted thermostats.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Where installing piping adjacent to air terminal unit, allow space for service and maintenance.

B. Hot-Water Piping: Comply with requirements in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and
Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties," and connect heating coils to supply with shutoff
valve, strainer, control valve, and union or flange; and to return with balancing valve and union
or flange.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for connecting ducts to air
terminal units.

D. Make connections to air terminal units with flexible connectors complying with requirements in
Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

233600 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Units should already be numbered. Otherwise, label each air terminal unit with plan number,
nominal airflow, and maximum and minimum factory-set airflows. Comply with requirements
in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for equipment labels and
warning signs and labels.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative:

1. After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements.
2. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.


2. Verify that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal unit manufacturer
to achieve proper performance.
3. Verify that controls and control enclosure are accessible.
4. Verify that control connections are complete.
5. Verify that nameplate and identification tag are visible.
6. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.

END OF SECTION 233600

233600 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 233713.13 - AIR DIFFUSERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control
dampers not integral to diffusers.
2. Section 233713.23 "Air Registers and Grilles" for adjustable-bar register and grilles,
fixed-face registers and grilles, and linear bar grilles.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.
2. Diffuser Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number,
size, and accessories furnished.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECTANGULAR AND SQUARE CEILING DIFFUSERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the


following:

1. Nailor Industries Inc.


2. Price Industries.
3. Titus.

B. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.

C. Material: Steel.

D. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.

233713.13 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where air diffusers are installed for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install air diffusers level and plumb.

B. Outlets and Inlets Locations: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and
accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements
for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations
where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in
the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify
Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install air diffusers with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of
dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

After installation, adjust air diffusers to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.

END OF SECTION 221117

233713.13 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 233713.23 - AIR REGISTERS AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Adjustable blade face grilles.


2. Fixed face grilles.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control
dampers not integral to registers and grilles.
2. Section 233713.13 "Air Diffusers" for various types of air diffusers.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.
2. Register and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity,
model number, size, and accessories furnished.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GRILLES

A. Adjustable Blade Face Grille A-5, A-6, & A-7:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the


following:

a. Nailor Industries Inc.


b. Price Industries.
c. Titus.

2. Material: Steel.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.
4. Face Blade Arrangement: Horizontal spaced 3/4 inch apart.
5. Rear-Blade Arrangement: Vertical spaced 3/4 inch apart.

B. Fixed Face Grille B-1 & B-2:

233713.23 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the


following:

a. Nailor Industries Inc.


b. Price Industries.
c. Titus.

2. Material: Steel.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.
4. Face Blade Arrangement: Horizontal; spaced 1/2 inch apart.
5. Accessory: Filter.
6. Face Arrangement: Perforated core.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where registers and grilles are installed for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install registers and grilles level and plumb.

B. Outlets and Inlets Locations: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and
accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements
for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations
where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in
the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify
Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install registers and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust registers and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before
starting air balancing.

END OF SECTION 233713.23

233713.23 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 234100 - PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Pleated panel filters.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensions; operating characteristics;
required clearances and access; rated flow capacity, including initial and final pressure drop at
rated airflow; efficiency and test method; fire classification; furnished specialties; and
accessories for each model indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Comply with ASHRAE 52.2 for MERV for methods of testing and rating air-filter units.

2.2 PLEATED PANEL FILTERS

A. Description: Factory-fabricated, self-supported, extended-surface, pleated, panel-type,


disposable air filters with holding frames.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:

a. 3M.
b. Airguard.
c. Camfil Farr.
d. Purafil, Inc.

B. Media: Cotton and synthetic fibers coated with nonflammable adhesive.

C. Filter-Media Frame: Galvanized steel sealed or bonded to the media.

D. Capacities and Characteristics:

234100 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1. Thickness or Depth: 1 inch .


2. MERV Rating: 8 when tested according to ASHRAE 52.2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic-control devices specified in
Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."
2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548.13
"Vibration Controls for HVAC."

B. Install filters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air.

C. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace
temporary filters used during construction and testing with new, clean filters.

D. Coordinate filter installations with duct and air-handling-unit installations.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Test for leakage of unfiltered air while system is operating.

C. Air filter will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.3 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing of air-handling and
air-distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filter media.

END OF SECTION 234100

234100 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.


2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. VFC: Variable frequency controller.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control reports.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated


on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division.


2. Alpha Wire.
3. Belden Inc.
4. Encore Wire Corporation.
5. General Cable Technologies Corporation.
6. Southwire Incorporated.

260519 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

C. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

D. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type


THHN-2-THWN-2.

E. VFC Cable:

1. Comply with UL 1277, UL 1685, and NFPA 70 for Type TC-ER cable.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated


on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.


2. Gardner Bender.
3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
4. Ideal Industries, Inc.
5. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation.
6. NSi Industries LLC.
7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group.
8. 3M; Electrical Markets Division.
9. Tyco Electronics.

C. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated.

2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG
and larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded.

260519 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND


WIRING METHODS

A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway .

B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2,


single conductors in raceway .

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to
Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and
cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used


must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will
not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members,
and follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published


torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that
possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced
conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for
Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of
conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

260519 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply
with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and
Cabling."

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration
Firestopping."

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,
test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

B. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Procedures used.
2. Results that comply with requirements.
3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.

C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

END OF SECTION 260519

260519 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with UL 467 and NFPA 30 or grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.2 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by
applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.


2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.
4. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.

260526 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

5. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules;
1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
6. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with
copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

2.3 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in
which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items
connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.

C. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression -type wire
terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they
may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install


bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
2. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection
is required, use a bolted clamp.

C. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

260526 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,
from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service
entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes;
use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of
the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect
grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit
or sleeve to conductor at each end.

D. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of
associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to
bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,
electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance
level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal. Make tests at
ground rods before any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of
precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural
drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of
reducing natural ground resistance.

C. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10
ohms.
2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.
3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3
ohms.
4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 3 ohm(s).

D. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify


Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

END OF SECTION 260526

260526 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive


engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and
design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported


equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads
calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the
applied force.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel slotted support systems.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with NFPA 70.

260529 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for
field assembly.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit.


b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
c. ERICO International Corporation.
d. GS Metals Corp.
e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
g. Wesanco, Inc.

3. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to


MFMA-4.
4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated
fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,
shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or
their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in


hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate
for supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,


manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.


2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3) Hilti Inc.
4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

260529 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS
Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for
attached structural element.
4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A
325.
5. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
6. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit


dimensions of supported equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical
equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in
diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or
other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future
without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for
1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above
suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
Article.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength
will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported
components plus 200 lb.

260529 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and


fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following
methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion


anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.
2. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
3. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock
washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or
greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less
than 4 inches thick.
4. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,
transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means
that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing
bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for


site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for cleaning and
touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on
miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION 260529

260529 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.


2. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
3. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing

D. FMC: Flexible Metallic Tubing

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover
enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and
attachment details.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:

1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.


2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with
common supports.

260533 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.


2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.
3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.
4. Electri-Flex Company.
5. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.
6. Picoma Industries, a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc.
7. Republic Conduit.
8. Robroy Industries.
9. Southwire Company.
10. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
11. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.
12. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company.

B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA
70.
2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel.
b. Type: compression.

3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with
overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

2.2 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Adalet.
2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
3. EGS/Appleton Electric.
4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
5. FSR Inc.
6. Hoffman; a Pentair company.
7. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division.

260533 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

8. Kraloy.
9. Milbank Manufacturing Co.
10. Mono-Systems, Inc.
11. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.
12. RACO; a Hubbell Company.
13. Robroy Industries.
14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures; a division of Robroy Industries.
16. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
17. Wiremold / Legrand.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with
gasketed cover.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC.


2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.


2. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the
following:

a. Paint Booth

3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.


4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or
wet locations.
5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 in
institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

260533 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this
type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after
installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and
apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements
on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits.
Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and
number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"
for hangers and supports.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for
control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of
changes in direction.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

H. Support conduit within 12 inchesof enclosures to which attached.

I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply
listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive


compound prior to assembly.

K. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings


to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

L. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes
or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal
bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install
insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

M. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install
locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

260533 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

N. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings


in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

O. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll
cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

P. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.
Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

Q. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with
listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with
a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install
raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

R. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or
boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all
raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated
spaces.
2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.
3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

S. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

T. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not
individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured
to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

U. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry
block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat
surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

V. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same
vertical channel.

W. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

X. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing
members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

Y. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by
conduits.

Z. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

AA. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor
surface.

260533 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply
with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and
Cabling."

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with
requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by


manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 260533

260533 - 6
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 260539 - UNDERFLOOR RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Flat-top, single- or multichannel, underfloor raceways.


2. Supports, raceway fittings, and hardware.
3. Junction boxes.
4. Service fittings.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Activation: Nomenclature used by some manufacturers for a service fitting.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include finishes, construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, and profiles for
underfloor raceway components, fittings, and accessories.
2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished
specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For underfloor raceways.

1. Include floor plans, elevations, sections, and details.


2. Detail fabrication and assembly of underfloor raceways.

a. Identify components and accessories, such as expansion-joint assemblies, straight


raceway lengths, preset and afterset inserts, and service fittings.
b. Detail preparation and installation methods and instructions.
c. Provide dimensions locating raceway header and distribution elements. Include
spacing between preset inserts and between preset inserts and ends of duct runs,
walls, columns, junction boxes, and header duct connections.
d. Provide raceway fill charts for each duct size provided for each conductor size the
duct is identified to accept. Provide separate charts for power and communication
conductors and cables.
e. Show connections between raceway elements and relationships between
components and adjacent structural and architectural elements, including slab
reinforcement, floor finish work, permanent partitions, expansion joints,
architectural module lines.
f. Indicate height of preset inserts, junction boxes, and raceways coordinated with
depth of concrete slab and floor fill.

260539 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

g. Indicate thickening of slabs where required for adequate encasement of raceway


components.
h. Document coordination of exposed components with floor-covering materials to
ensure that fittings and trim are suitable for indicated floor-covering material.
i. Revise locations from those indicated in the Contract Documents, as required to
suit field conditions and to ensure a functioning layout. Identify proposed
deviations from the Contract Documents.
j. Show details of connections and terminations of underfloor raceways at
panelboards and communication terminal equipment in equipment rooms, wire
closets, and similar spaces.
k. Identify those cells of cellular floor deck that are to be connected and fitted for the
following underfloor distribution:

1) Power.
2) Voice.
3) Data.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For underfloor raceways, to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"


include the following:

a. Manufacturer's written instructions for locating preset inserts and for installing
afterset inserts.

B. Project Record Documents: Submit final as-built Drawings, indicating dimensioned locations
for all ducts, junction boxes, and preset inserts. Typical spacing designation shall be accepted
only for preset insert spacing along a continuous length of duct.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Afterset Inserts: Furnish quantity equal to 5 percent of each type of preset insert installed,
but no fewer than 20Insert number units.
2. Service Fittings: Furnish three of each type of service fitting indicated for each 100 feet
of distribution raceway or active-floor-cell length.
3. Outlet Blanking Covers: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of each type of floor
opening installed for outlets, but no fewer than 20Insert number units.

B. Furnish one electronic instrument(s) insert installation tool and other tools, as recommended by
underfloor raceway manufacturer for detecting, locating, and uncovering preset inserts and
installing afterset inserts in metal raceway under floor covering and up to 3/8 inch of concrete
fill.

260539 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site


testing.

B. Comply with UL 884.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. Mockup: Install a mockup for evaluation of surface preparation and duct installation techniques
and workmanship.

1. Mockup area shall be designated by Architect.


2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, appearance, and performance
are approved.
3. Repair or reinstall mockup area as required to produce acceptable work.
4. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
5. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 FLAT-TOP, STEEL UNDERFLOOR RACEWAYS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product


indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. MonoSystems Inc.
2. Square D; Schneider Electric.
3. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
4. Wiremold Walker Duct.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain underfloor raceway components for each system through single
source from single manufacturer.

C. Description:

1. Material: One-piece, continuous weld, minimum 0.0598-inch- thick steel, with


corrosion-resistant, galvanized coating inside and out after welding.

260539 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

2. Cross-Section Shape: Rectangular, with rounded corners.


3. Number of Levels: One.
4. Minimum Bending Radius for Communication Cables: Combination of raceways,
fittings, inserts, junction boxes, service fittings, and mounting and connection
arrangements for wiring devices and jacks shall provide a 2-inch- minimum bending
radius for communication cables.

D. Service Raceways: Fitted with preset inserts.

1. Nominal Single-Channel Underfloor Raceway Dimensions:

a. Depth: 1-1/2 inches.


b. Power Service Raceway Width: 3-1/4 inches.
c. Communication Service Raceway Width: 3-1/4 inches.

2. Preset Inserts: Rectangular.

a. Spacing: 24 inches o.c.


b. Size: Rectangular dimensions as required to accommodate mounting and
connection of surface-mounted, single- and multiple-outlet service fittings or to
connect to wiring extensions for feeding modular work station furniture for power
communications and data.
c. Equip each insert with a disposable cover, and select insert height so cover is 1/8
inch below surface of concrete.
d. Arrange insert for optional attachment of surface- or wiring-extension service
fitting to replace disposable cover. Arrange brackets, mountings, barriers, and floor
access covers to support, isolate, and provide access to surface outlet-mounting
connector, jack, and receptacle devices.

2.3 SUPPORTS, RACEWAY FITTINGS, AND HARDWARE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain underfloor raceway supports, fittings, and hardware components for
each system through single source from single manufacturer.

B. Supports, fittings, and hardware shall be compatible with raceway and outlet system and shall
be listed for use with raceway systems and components delivered.

C. Supports: Adjustable for height and arranged to maintain alignment and spacing of raceways
during concrete placement. Include hold-down straps.

D. Raceway Fittings: Couplings, expansion-joint sleeves, cross-under offsets, vertical and


horizontal elbows, grounding screws, adapters, end caps, and other fittings suitable for use with
basic components to form a complete installation.

2.4 JUNCTION BOXES

A. Description: Raceway manufacturer's standard enclosure for indicated type, quantity,


arrangement, and configuration of raceways at each raceway junction, intersection, and access
location. Include the following accessories and features:

260539 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1. Mounting brackets.
2. Escutcheons and holders to accommodate surrounding floor covering.
3. Means for leveling and height adjustment more than 3/8 inch before and after concrete is
placed.
4. Boxes shall withstand a minimum 300-lb concentrated load. Internal supports shall be
provided as needed to meet this requirement.
5. All boxes shall provide 2-inch- minimum bend radius for data and communication cables.
6. Raceway Openings: For underfloor raceways and conduits arranged to accommodate
raceway layout.
7. Covers shall have appropriate depth recess to receive specific floor finish material.
8. Partitions to separate wiring of different systems.

2.5 SERVICE FITTINGS/ACTIVATIONS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain underfloor raceway service fittings and hardware for each system
through single source from single manufacturer.

B. Exposed Parts Finish: Brushed aluminum.

C. Flush, Single- Multiple-System Service Fitting for Rectangular Inserts: Include mounting,
hinged cover, and trim to support and provide access to connector, jack, or receptacle devices
mounted flush with floor within insert.

1. Recess-Mounted Service Fitting: Modular fittings compatible with preset inserts. Include
device plates for indicated systems and provisions for receptacles, jacks, and connectors.
Include hinged flush covers with recessed depth to match thickness of floor finish
material. Provide for internally mounted receptacle- and communication-jack and
connector assemblies complying with requirements in Section 262726 "Wiring Devices"
and Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling."

D. Surface-Mounted Service Fitting: Modular pedestal type, with locking attachment matched to
insert floor opening.

1. Power-outlet, single-faced, surface-mounted unit for duplex receptacle on one side.


2. Communication-outlet, single-faced, surface-mounted unit with bushed opening on one
side; 1-inch minimum diameter; insulated with nonconducting material.
3. Coordinate with Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" and Division 27,
"Telecommunications Standards for the Mike Monroney Aeronautical Center," and
indicate types and locations of devices on Drawings.

a. Duplex convenience receptacle.


b. Duplex communication jack, rated for Category 6.
c. Wiring-Extension Service Fittings: Arrangement of brackets and mountings to
support and provide access to wiring or cabling of a cell, and to connect the cable
or raceway that extends the system to an individual wall outlet. Provide for
connection of FMC for power extensions, and optical fiber/communication cable
raceway for communication system extensions.

260539 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install raceways aligned and leveled and, unless otherwise indicated, parallel or perpendicular
to floor supports.

B. Maintain arrangement of conductor services throughout the raceway system.

C. Arrange supports to attain proper elevation, alignment, and spacing of raceways. Fasten
supports securely at ends and at intervals not to exceed 60 inches, to prevent movement during
concrete pour.

D. Level raceway components with finished slab and make adjustments in raceway component
elevation to accommodate indicated floor finishes.

E. Junction Boxes: Install tops level and flush with finished floor. Install blank closure plates or
plugs to close unused junction-box openings. Grout boxes in place to prevent movement during
construction. Place top covers in inverted position during construction to prevent damage to
surface of cover. Reinstall covers in proper position prior to final acceptance of the Work.

F. Install preset inserts per manufacturer's instructions.

G. Adjust supports to maintain a 1/8- to 3/8-inch finished concrete cover over preset inserts.

H. Remove burrs, sharp edges, dents, and mechanical defects.

I. Cap or plug boxes, insert- and service-fitting openings, and open ends of raceways.

J. Install expansion fittings with suitable bonding jumper where raceways cross building
expansion joints.

K. Bond underfloor raceway components to create a continuous bonding path.

L. Seal raceways, cells, junction boxes, and inserts to prevent water, concrete, or foreign matter
from entering raceways before and during pouring slab or placing fill. Tape joints or seal with
compound, as recommended in writing by underfloor raceway manufacturer.

M. Install a marker at the center of the last insert of each cell and channel of each straight run of
metal underfloor service raceway to locate the insert and identify the system.

260539 - 6
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1. Install markers at last inserts on both sides of permanent walls and at first inserts adjacent
to each junction box.
2. Install markers flush at screed line before pouring slab or placing fill. Extend marker with
grommeted screw when floor covering is placed. Do not extend through carpet.
3. Use slotted-head screw to identify electrical power; use Phillips-head screw to identify
conventional communications.

N. Protect underfloor raceway system from damage. Do not use the installed duct system as
working platforms or walkways. Do not allow equipment or heavy traffic over duct during
construction period, without first installing ramps over the duct. Ramps shall be designed so
that imposed loads are not transferred to the duct. Components of the system that are damaged
during construction shall be replaced.

O. Install concrete surrounding underfloor raceways according to Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place


Concrete."

P. Wiring shall comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables" and NFPA 70 requirements for wet locations.

1. Install wiring from outlet insert toward junction boxes, then to termination at panel.
2. Splices: All splices and taps shall be made in junction boxes. No splices or taps shall be
made in raceways or outlet inserts.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative:

1. Perform visual inspection of interior of each junction box to verify absence of dirt, dust,
construction debris, and moisture. Replace damaged and malfunctioning components.
2. Prior to and after concrete pour, perform point-to-point tests of ground continuity and
resistance of ground path between the most remote accessible fitting on each branch of
each underfloor raceway system and the main electrical distribution grounding system.

a. Determine cause and perform correction of any point-to-point resistance value that
exceeds 0.05 ohms.
b. Comply with NETA Acceptance Testing Specification about safety, suitability of
test equipment, test instrument calibration, and test report and records.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean and swab out underfloor raceways, inserts, and junction boxes after finish has been
applied to floor slab, and remove foreign material, dirt, and moisture. Leave interiors clean and
dry.

END OF SECTION 260539

260539 - 7
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 260544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND
CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.
2. Sleeve-seal systems.
3. Sleeve-seal fittings.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated,
plain ends.

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.


b. CALPICO, Inc.
c. Metraflex Company (The).
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
e. Proco Products, Inc.
f. .

260544 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.
Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
4. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible
boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

END OF SECTION 260544

260544 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Identification for conductors.


2. Warning labels and signs.
3. Instruction signs.
4. Equipment identification labels.
5. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting
provisions, and graphic features of identification products.

C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system


components used in identification signs and labels.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in
other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's
wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by
codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of


surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

260553 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- thick flexible label with
acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant,
self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the cable diameter such
that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.

2.2 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- thick flexible label with
acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant,
self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the conductor diameter
such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.

2.3 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive


labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless
otherwise indicated.

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size
required for application.
2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.

D. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -


EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN
FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."

2.4 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20
sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.


2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable
equipment.

260553 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal
transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall
provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

2.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal
transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall
provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

C. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with


white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting.
White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

2.6 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, Type
6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.


2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.
4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners
appropriate to the location and substrate.

260553 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label
that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control
panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,
lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is
provided with its own identification.

END OF SECTION 260553

260553 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Indoor occupancy sensors.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy sensors,
and manual light switches.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable


product by one of the following:

1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company.


2. Cooper Industries, Inc.
3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.
4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
5. Lightolier Controls.
6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.
7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.
8. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products.
9. RAB Lighting.
10. Sensor Switch, Inc.
11. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
12. Watt Stopper.

B. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy


sensors with a separate power pack.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and application.

260923 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied,
and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable
over a minimum range of 1 to 30 minutes.
3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A.
Sensor is powered from the power pack.
4. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A
tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2
power source, as defined by NFPA 70.
5. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.


b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical
enclosure.
c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged
door.

6. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal
operation of sensor.
7. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure.

C. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling or wall mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR
and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies
that control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.


2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion
of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of
average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical
manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.
3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular
area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of devices with other construction that may interfere with
proper operation.

B. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas
indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch.

260923 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and


nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless
otherwise indicated.

D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification
for Electrical Systems."

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial


Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions

1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set
time delay to suit Owner's operations.

END OF SECTION 260923

260923 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Distribution panelboards.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device,
transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions
and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,
and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of


installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.
2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.
6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent
protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper;
include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load
balancing.

262416 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01700001
"Contract Closeout," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective


devices.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site


testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and


accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items.
Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary
electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied
by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electric
service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission.
3. Comply with NFPA 70E.

262416 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast
anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are
specified with concrete.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or


replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Enclosures: Surface -mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match
box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.
3. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with
flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.
4. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after
cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish
consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.
b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel.

5. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder or metal
frame with transparent protective cover.

B. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.

C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

262416 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.


2. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed
as suitable for nonlinear loads.

D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.


2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.
3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.
4. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on
extra-capacity neutral bus.

E. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary
appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

F. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit


current available at terminals.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated


on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.


2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

2.3 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated


on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.


2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

C. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, fully rated to meet available
fault currents.

262416 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
materials.
b. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity
discharge (HID) lighting circuits.
c. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts
mimic circuit-breaker contacts and "b" contacts operate in reverse of
circuit-breaker contacts.
d. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key
shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.
e. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a
single unit.
f. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle
in on or off position.
g. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on
position.

2.4 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from
panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and
switchboard class relays.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or
have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.

B. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

C. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed
panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

262416 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

D. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

F. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing
load balancing.

G. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning


signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads;
incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a
computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with


requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical
Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a
nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to


inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,
and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

262416 - 6
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards
included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,
remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated

C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.


2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of
the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax
machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.
3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings
before and after changes and submit test records.
4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard,
is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum
requirement.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to


manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION 262416

262416 - 7
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Receptacles and associated device plates.


2. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.
3. Floor service outlets.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

B. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

C. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.


2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following


manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).


2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).
3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).
4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

262726 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single
source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6


Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be


incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex).


b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex).
c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).
d. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).

2.4 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be


incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Single Pole:

2) Cooper; AH1221.
3) Hubbell; HBL1221.
4) Leviton; 1221-2.
5) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1.

2.5 WALL-BOX DIMMERS

A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches,
with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.

B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply


with UL 1472.

262726 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

2.6 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.


2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch- thick, satin-finished, Type 302 stainless
steel.
3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.

2.7 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Type: Modular, above-floor, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.

B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.

C. Service Plate: Rectangular, die-cast aluminum with satin finish.

D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise


indicated.

E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45 jacks for UTP
cable as indicated in the drawing set and complying with requirements in Division 27
"Telecommunications Standards for the Mike Monroney Aeronautical Center."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise
indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device
boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside
of boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,
paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and
cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint
unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated
on devices.

262726 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose.
Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails.
4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.


b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were
installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
conductors.
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last
possible moment.
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.
5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid
conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal
screw.
6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.
7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold
device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount
outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

F. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.


2. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to
manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension
vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under
single, multigang wall plates.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped,
or engraved machine printing with black -filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire
markers or tags inside outlet boxes.

262726 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative:

1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.


2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital
readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.


2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable.
3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
4. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
5. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit
breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar
problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new
ones, and retest as specified above.

END OF SECTION 262726

262726 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.


2. Emergency lighting units.
3. Exit signs.
4. Lighting fixture supports.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

C. CRI: Color-rendering index.

D. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation.
Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.


2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.
3. Ballast, including BF.
4. Energy-efficiency data.
5. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with
IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture
type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to
those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.

a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be
certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for
remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer.

265100 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a


manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary
Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment,
fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be


incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS

A. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

B. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

C. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent
warping and sagging.

265100 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during
relamping and when secured in operating position.

E. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.


b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

F. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts.
Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen
from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.


b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad,
triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact
fluorescent luminaires.
c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for
HID luminaires.
d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact
fluorescent luminaires.
e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.
f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

G. Electromagnetic-Interference Filters: Factory installed to suppress conducted electromagnetic


interference as required by MIL-STD-461E. Fabricate lighting fixtures with one filter on each
ballast indicated to require a filter.

H. Provide fluorescent fixtures for hazardous locations which conform to UL 844 or which have
Factory Mutual certification for the class and division indicated on the drawings.

2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts:

1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11.


2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served.
3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level
control is indicated.
4. Sound Rating: Class A.
5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.
6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better.

265100 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

7. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher.


8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
9. BF: 0.88 or higher.
10. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher.
11. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.11 and
shall be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps
fail.

B. Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T5HO Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and the
following:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps.


2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.

2.4 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT

A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting
fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of


1100 lumens each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched
circuit to fixture ballast.
2. Nightlight Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously.
3. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or
entering ceiling space.

a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power
and demonstrates unit operability.
b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle
charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.


5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer
relay.

2.5 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility,
luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: Incandescent LED, 20,000 hours of rated lamp life.
2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained
power pack.

a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.


b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.

265100 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage
drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is
restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically
recharged and floated on charger.
d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal
power and demonstrates unit operability.
e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle
charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
f. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates
code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is
annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.6 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. T5HO rapid-start, high-output lamps, rated 54 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches,
5000 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and average
rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and
angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy.
Finish same as fixture.

C. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with
threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures:

1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.
2. Install lamps in each luminaire.
3. Each light fixture shall be separately supported from structure by hangers from
diagonally opposite corners.

B. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.

265100 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.

C. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply
with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical
Systems."

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.
Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and
interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate
compliance with standards.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by
Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least
100 hours at full voltage.

END OF SECTION 265100

265100 - 6
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Interior solid-state luminaires that use LED technology.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.

C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

E. LED: Light-emitting diode.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation.


2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.
3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires.
4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers.
5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy efficiency data.
6. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests IES LM-79 and IES
LM-80.

a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's


laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
b. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data certified
by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining
luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.

265119 - 1
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Lamps: Five of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
2. Diffusers and Lenses: Ten of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each
type.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's


laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent


agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as
defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient
Lighting Products, and complying with the applicable IES testing standards.

C. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.

D. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color
consistency among luminaires.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering


before shipping.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C79.1.

C. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61.

265119 - 2
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

D. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 4000K.

E. Rated lamp life of 35,000 hours.

F. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.

G. Internal driver.

H. Nominal Operating Voltage: 277 V ac.

2.2 DOWNLIGHT

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated


on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Cooper Lighting.
2. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.
3. Pinnacle Architectural Lighting.

B. Minimum 2360 lumens. Minimum allowable efficacy of 80 lumens per watt.

C. Universal mounting bracket.

D. Integral junction box with conduit fittings.

2.3 LINEAR INDUSTRIAL

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated


on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Cooper Lighting.
2. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.

2.4 RECESSED LINEAR

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated


on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Cooper Lighting.
2. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.
3. Pinnacle Architectural Lighting.

B. Minimum 2360 lumens. Minimum allowable efficacy of 85 lumens per watt.

C. Integral junction box with conduit fittings.

265119 - 3
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

2.5 STRIP LIGHT

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated


on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Cooper Lighting.
2. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.
3. Philips Lighting Company.

B. Integral junction box with conduit fittings.

2.6 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts:

1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.


2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated.
3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during
relamping and when secured in operating position.

C. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Clear, UV-stabilized acrylic


2. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

D. Housings:

1. Steel housing and heat sink.


2. White painted finish.

2.7 METAL FINISHES

A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining
components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be
and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

265119 - 4
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical
connections before fixture installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.

3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING

A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When
construction is sufficiently complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting and install
new lamps.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Supports:

1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight.


2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping.
3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall.
4. Luminaire mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100
percent of luminaire weight and vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.

E. Flush-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Secured to outlet box.


2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around
circumference of luminaire.
3. Trim ring flush with finished surface.

F. Suspended Luminaire Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches , brace to limit swinging.
2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with
approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire
oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices.

265119 - 5
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

3. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or
rod for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end.
4. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods
to building structure.

G. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires:

1. Secure to any required outlet box.


2. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling grid and
building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.

H. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables" for wiring connections.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after
electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.
2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.
Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Comply with requirements for startup specified in Section 260943.16 "Addressable-Fixture


Lighting Controls."

B. Comply with requirements for startup specified in Section 260943.23 "Relay-Based Lighting
Controls."

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,


provide on-site assistance in adjusting the direction of aim of luminaires to suit occupied
conditions. Make up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal hours for this purpose.
Some of this work may be required during hours of darkness.

265119 - 6
FAA-WO 14-024479 May 29, 2015

1. During adjustment visits, inspect all luminaires. Replace lamps or luminaires that are
defective.
2. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.
3. Adjust the aim of luminaires in the presence of the Architect.

END OF SECTION 265119

265119 - 7
AMC QPM # Revision

Quality Management System AMIFM-40001 8

Title: Division 27 Telecommunications Date: 04/17/2014 Page 1 of 61

Process Owner: Cheryl Hixon Approved By: Danny Thomas

DIVISION
27

Telecommunications Standards for the


Mike Monroney Aeronautical Center

Approval: ________________________________________________
Title: Danny Thomas, Unit Manager, Telecommunications Unit, AMK-222A

Process owner: ___________________________________________


Title: Cheryl Hixon, Telecommunications Specialist, AMK-222A

UNCONTROLLED COPY WHEN DOWNLOADED


Check the Master List to Verify That This is the Correct Revision Before Use
Date Printed: 4/17/2014
Revision 8 – 04/17/2014
AMC QPM # Revision

Quality Management System AMIFM-40001 8

Title: Division 27 Telecommunications Date: 04/17/2014 Page 2 of 61

Process Owner: Cheryl Hixon Approved By: Danny Thomas

Revision History
Rev Description of Change Effective Date
7 Update position configuration and equipment list. 08/01/2012
8 Update equipment list, jack labeling, routing symbols 02/03/2014

UNCONTROLLED COPY WHEN DOWNLOADED


Check the Master List to Verify That This is the Correct Revision Before Use
Date Printed: 4/17/2014
Revision 8 – 02/03/2014
AMC QPM # Revision

Quality Management System AMIFM-40001 8

Title: Division 27 Telecommunications Date: 04/17/2014 Page 3 of 61

Process Owner: Cheryl Hixon Approved By: Danny Thomas

TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 27 – TELECOMMUNICATIONS Page
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS
1. PART: GENERAL 3
1.1 SECURITY 3
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3
1.3 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, STANDARDS AND CODES 3-4
1.4 COORDINATION 4-5
1.5 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS 5
1.6 SUBMITTALS 5-6
1.7 RECORD DRAWINGS 6-7
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE 7
1.9 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SUBCONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS 8
1.10 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES 8
1.11 WARRANTY 8-9
1.12 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 9
1.13 SUBMITTALS 10
2. PART: PRODUCTS 10
2.1 GENERAL 10
2.2 MATERIALS 10-16
3. PART: EXECUTION 16
3.1 INSTALLATION 16-17
3.2 EXAMINATION OF SURFACE CONDITIONS 17-18
3.3 TESTING 18-19
3.4 PROTECTION OF SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 20
3.5 WORK PERFORMANCE 21
3.6 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT 21
3.7 CABLE TERMINATION AND DRESS 22
3.8 UPS POWER 22
3.9 CLEANING 22
3.10 COMPLETION 22-23
3.11 TESTING AND VERIFICATION 23-25
4. TELECOMMUNICATIONS JACK LABELING STANDARD 25-31
5. TELECOMMUNICATIONS JACK CABLING STANDARD 32-33
6. COPPER/FIBER SPLICING STANDARD 33-54
7. MMAC COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL SPECIFICAITONS 54-65
8. COPPER FEEDER LABELING SCHEME 66
9. FIBER LABELING SCHEME 66-67
10. TELECOMMUNICATIONS IN SYSTEMS FURNITURE 67-68

UNCONTROLLED COPY WHEN DOWNLOADED


Check the Master List to Verify That This is the Correct Revision Before Use
Date Printed: 4/17/2014
Revision 8 – 02/03/2014
AMC QPM # Revision

Quality Management System AMIFM-40001 8

Title: Division 27 Telecommunications Date: 04/17/2014 Page 4 of 61

Process Owner: Cheryl Hixon Approved By: Danny Thomas

DIVISION 27 – TELECOMMUNICATIONS

SECTION 27000 – GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS

CONSTRUCTION STANDARD

1. PART: GENERAL

1.1. SECURITY
Telecommunications Security – For reasons of security and separation of function, independent networks of
other agencies, tenant organizations, private companies, etc. located within the Mike Monroney
Aeronautical Center shall have independent network cable totally isolated from any FAA infrastructure (to
include data, analog or voice). At the least, isolated conduit and separate positions at the user location are
required. Other requirements may include separate closets. It is a requirement for the independent network
cable and jack to have colors different than that in use by the FAA network/voice cables and other
independent existing networks. Therefore coordination with the Telecommunications Unit (AMK-222A) is
required in planning of all network connectivity for all organizations, agencies, tenant organizations, or
private companies occupying space at the Mike Monroney Aeronautical Center.

1.2. RELATED DOCUMENTS

1.2.1. Drawings and general provisions, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General
Requirements (if any), are hereby made a part of this Section. Refer to paragraph titled
“Telecommunications Subcontractor Qualifications” in this section for requirements for
Telecommunications Subcontractors. Throughout this and related Sections, “Subcontractor” shall
not be limited to the singular and masculine and shall refer to one, or more than one,
Telecommunications Subcontractor(s).

1.3. REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, STANDARDS AND CODES

1.3.1. Comply with the referenced codes and standards within this document. Where conflicts occur,
the more stringent shall apply.

1.3.2. Work shall meet or exceed the standards and procedures of the following:
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
Telecommunications Industries Association (TIA)

UNCONTROLLED COPY WHEN DOWNLOADED


Check the Master List to Verify That This is the Correct Revision Before Use
Date Printed: 4/17/2014
Revision 8 – 02/03/2014
AMC QPM # Revision

Quality Management System AMIFM-40001 8

Title: Division 27 Telecommunications Date: 04/17/2014 Page 5 of 61

Process Owner: Cheryl Hixon Approved By: Danny Thomas

Electronic Industries Association (EIA)


National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)
Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
American Standards Association (ASA)
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
American Society of Testing Material (ASTM)
National Electric Code (NEC)
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
In the event of conflicts, the more stringent provisions shall apply.

1.3.3. Construction Project Manager (CPM): As defined for Sections referring to telecommunications
work only, the CPM shall be the design analyst employed by the FAA for the purpose of observing
the work of the Telecommunications Subcontractor.

1.3.4. All Indefinite Delivery Requirements (IDR) contract work shall be turn-key.
Telecommunications technicians shall perform all telecommunications work to include testing
telecommunications cables prior to pull (fiber) , pulling telecommunications cables (copper and
fiber), testing telecommunications cables after pull (copper and fiber), termination of
telecommunications cables (copper and fiber) and final testing. Test results and as-built drawing to
include telecommunications position numbers shall be provided to AMP-400. AMP-400 will
provide test results and as-built drawings to include telecommunications position numbers to
AMK-222A for approval and acceptance, prior to personnel occupying renovated or newly
constructed area.

1.4. COORDINATION

1.4.1. When articles, materials, operations or methods related to execution of telecommunications work
are noted, specified, or described in the specifications of, are indicated or reasonably implied on
drawings and schedules, execute work as required or appropriate to provide complete and proper
function, operation and installation.

1.4.2. The drawings utilize symbols and schematic diagrams to indicate items of work. These symbols
and diagrams will not typically identify dimensions nor will they identify inclusion of specific
accessories, appurtenances, and related items necessary and appropriate for a complete and proper
installation and operation. The Telecommunications Subcontractor shall install work complete and

UNCONTROLLED COPY WHEN DOWNLOADED


Check the Master List to Verify That This is the Correct Revision Before Use
Date Printed: 4/17/2014
Revision 8 – 02/03/2014
AMC QPM # Revision

Quality Management System AMIFM-40001 8

Title: Division 27 Telecommunications Date: 04/17/2014 Page 6 of 61

Process Owner: Cheryl Hixon Approved By: Danny Thomas

ready for proper operation, including related items not specifically identified, shown, indicated or
specified. The work shall be installed in accordance with the intent diagrammatically expressed on
the drawings, and in conformity with the dimensions indicated on architectural drawings and on
shop drawings approved by the Telecommunications Unit, Telecommunications Infrastructure
Planning Team (TIPT). When abbreviations appear on the drawings or specifications in upper or
lower case letters, with or without periods, the resultant work shall be as stated above.

1.4.3. The drawings include details for various items, which are specific with regard to the dimensions
and positioning of the work. These details are intended only for the purpose of establishing general
feasibility. They do not obviate field coordination for the indicated work. Work shall not proceed
until actual field conditions and requirements are verified by the Telecommunications
Subcontractor.

1.4.4. The drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of systems and equipment
unless indicated otherwise by dimensions.

1.5. DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS

1.5.1. Furnish and install materials for the Telecommunications Infrastructure systems as specified
herein and as shown on the drawings. Upon completion, the systems shall be functioning systems
in compliance with performance requirements specified.

1.5.2. The cabling specified and shown on the drawings is for complete, performance based, workable
systems. Deviations from the cabling shown due to a particular manufacturer’s requirements shall
be made only with the written approval of the FAA and at no additional cost to the FAA.

1.6. SUBMITTALS

1.6.1. Submittals shall be made as one complete package. Submittals for equipment shall be provided
to AMK-222A for review prior to purchase/installation.

1.6.2. Submittals for individual systems and equipment assemblies, which consist of more than one
item or component, shall be made for the system or assembly as a whole. Partial submittals will
not be considered, reviewed or stored, and such submittals will not be returned except at the
request and expense of the Contractor.

1.6.3. Generate shop drawings on AutoCAD, Version 2006 or later. Modify reviewed and accepted
shop drawings to include revisions based upon completion of work. Submit shop drawings with

UNCONTROLLED COPY WHEN DOWNLOADED


Check the Master List to Verify That This is the Correct Revision Before Use
Date Printed: 4/17/2014
Revision 8 – 02/03/2014
AMC QPM # Revision

Quality Management System AMIFM-40001 8

Title: Division 27 Telecommunications Date: 04/17/2014 Page 7 of 61

Process Owner: Cheryl Hixon Approved By: Danny Thomas

record drawings in hard copy and an electronic copy. Electronic copies are to be written to CD or
DVD if they cannot be provided through a shared drive.

1.6.4. Shop drawings shall include equipment racks, patch panels, termination blocks, connection
details, rack mounting details and any other details not included in the construction drawings.

1.7. RECORD DRAWINGS

1.7.1. Provide Record Drawings for requirements regarding Project Record Documents. “As-Built”
record documentation for telecommunications work shall include:

System function diagrams


Manufacturers’ description literature for equipment
Connection and programming schedules as appropriate
Equipment material list including quantities
Spare parts list with quantities
Details not on original Contract Documents
Test Results
Warranties
Release of Liens

1.7.2. Operation and Maintenance Manual:

1.7.2.1.The Telecommunications Subcontractor shall submit manuals that will contain


manufacturers’ brochures of items installed by the Telecommunications Subcontractor.

1.7.2.2.The manual shall be subdivided into separate sections with tab dividers to identify
subsystems of the integrated system. Reference appropriate specification sections.

1.7.2.3.Provide the following additional information for each electronic system. Information shall
be edited for projects where applicable.

 Operations manuals for components and for system as a whole.


 Maintenance Manuals for components and for system as a whole.
 Point-to-point diagrams, cabling diagrams, construction details and cable labeling details.
 List of spare parts, materials and suppliers of components.
 Provide name, address and telephone number for each supplier.
 Emergency instructions for operational and maintenance requirements.
 Delivery time frame for replacement of component parts from suppliers.
UNCONTROLLED COPY WHEN DOWNLOADED
Check the Master List to Verify That This is the Correct Revision Before Use
Date Printed: 4/17/2014
Revision 8 – 02/03/2014
AMC QPM # Revision

Quality Management System AMIFM-40001 8

Title: Division 27 Telecommunications Date: 04/17/2014 Page 8 of 61

Process Owner: Cheryl Hixon Approved By: Danny Thomas

 Recommend inspection schedule and procedures for components and for system as a
whole.
 Complete “Reviewed” shop drawings and product data for components and system as a
whole.
 Troubleshooting procedures for each system and for each major system component.

1.8. QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.8.1. Equipment and materials required for installation under these specifications shall be the current
model and new (less than one year from date of manufacture), unused and without blemish or
defects.

1.8.2. Manufacturers of equipment and materials, pertinent to these items shall have been engaged in
the manufacture of said equipment a minimum of three years.

1.8.3. Provide a written quality assurance plan for approval by the FAA including testing; plan for pre-
testing and for final testing and certification of pre-testing and commissioning prior to final testing.
Ensure compliance with Contract Documents. Include back-check as part of testing plans.

1.8.4. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of cable and devices of the types
and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than 3 years.

1.8.5. EIA/TIA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Telecommunications Industry


Association/Electrical Industry Association standards pertaining to cable, wire and connectors.

1.8.6. UL Labels: Provide cable, wire and connectors, which have been approved, listed and labeled by
Underwriters Laboratories.

1.8.7. Installers: Installers shall be certified for installation of the Avaya Gigamax Level 6 cable
system specified, and shall provide written warranty from the manufacturer to guarantee the
installed system performance at the data throughput level as specified.

UNCONTROLLED COPY WHEN DOWNLOADED


Check the Master List to Verify That This is the Correct Revision Before Use
Date Printed: 4/17/2014
Revision 8 – 02/03/2014
AMC QPM # Revision

Quality Management System AMIFM-40001 8

Title: Division 27 Telecommunications Date: 04/17/2014 Page 9 of 61

Process Owner: Cheryl Hixon Approved By: Danny Thomas

1.9. TELECOMMUNICATIONS SUBCONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS

1.9.1. General: The telecommunications subcontractor shall have total responsibility for the
coordination and installation of the work shown and described in the telecommunications drawings
and specifications. The telecommunications subcontractor shall be a company specializing in the
design, fabrication and installation of integrated telecommunications systems.

1.9.2. Telecommunications systems specified shall be engineered, assembled and installed under the
direction of a pre-qualified telecommunications subcontractor. Pre-qualification requirements shall
include submittal by the telecommunications subcontractor to the architect of the following:
1.9.2.1.List of previous projects of this scope and nature, including names and sizes of projects,
description of work, time of completion, and name of contact persons for reference.
1.9.2.2.Installers shall certify that they are manufacturer-authorized for work to be performed.

1.10. COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

1.10.1. The telecommunications subcontractor shall coordinate telecommunications work with that of
other sections as required ensuring that the entire telecommunications work will be carried out in
an orderly, complete and coordinated fashion.

1.11. WARRANTY

1.11.1. Warranty work is to be free from defects. Repair or replace defective materials or workmanship,
as well as damage to the work of other trades resulting from same, as directed by the FAA for the
duration of the stipulated warranty period.

1.11.2. The primary suppliers of telecommunications hardware and software shall warranty, through the
telecommunications subcontractor, in writing, phases of systems (including but not limited to,
software, hardware, and peripheral equipment) against defective materials, design and
workmanship. Upon receipt of notice from the FAA of failure of the system, or parts thereof, the
UNCONTROLLED COPY WHEN DOWNLOADED
Check the Master List to Verify That This is the Correct Revision Before Use
Date Printed: 4/17/2014
Revision 8 – 02/03/2014
AMC QPM # Revision

Quality Management System AMIFM-40001 8

Title: Division 27 Telecommunications Date: 04/17/2014 Page 10 of 61

Process Owner: Cheryl Hixon Approved By: Danny Thomas

telecommunications subcontractor, with the assistance of the supplier, shall promptly restore the
defective component to provide an acceptable system at no cost to the FAA. The
telecommunications subcontractor shall warranty the performance of the system for its intended
use for a period of 1 year from the date of final acceptance, and shall “pass-through” and shall
activate the manufacturers’ warranties to the FAA for the full extent and period of the
manufacturer’s warranty.
1.11.3. The warranty period shall commence upon final acceptance of the work by the FAA.
Acceptance tests and procedures shall be developed by the telecommunications subcontractor in
accordance with the provisions of this specification and accepted by the FAA. The
telecommunications subcontractor shall test the installed systems in accordance with the accepted
test procedures.
1.11.4. Acceptance by a manufacturer of an order for equipment for this contract signifies acceptance of
specified warranty requirements.
1.11.5. During the warranty period, there shall be no charges to the FAA for service calls (mileage,
labor, travel, expenses, etc.) for warranty related work.
1.12. DESCRIPTION OF WORK

1.12.1. The extent of telephone and data work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by the
requirements of this section.

1.12.2. The types of components required for the project include the following:
Riser Cable – Fiber and Copper
Station Cable
Jacks and Mounting Frames
Termination Equipment – Fiber and Copper
Product Data: Cable, jacks, termination equipment and accessories
All above equipment is contractor furnished and installed on all IDIQ projects.

1.13. SUBMITTALS

1.13.1. The FAA Telecommunications Unit TIPT must approve any proposed substitutions for the
specified telecommunications cables. Proposed substitutions are to be coordinated through AMP-
400.
UNCONTROLLED COPY WHEN DOWNLOADED
Check the Master List to Verify That This is the Correct Revision Before Use
Date Printed: 4/17/2014
Revision 8 – 02/03/2014
AMC QPM # Revision

Quality Management System AMIFM-40001 8

Title: Division 27 Telecommunications Date: 04/17/2014 Page 11 of 61

Process Owner: Cheryl Hixon Approved By: Danny Thomas

2. PART: PRODUCTS

2.1. GENERAL

2.1.1. For each system, provide all wire, cable, jacks, termination accessories and other components as
required to form a complete system of the types indicated or specified.

2.2. MATERIALS

2.2.1. Manufactured Products:

2.2.1.1.Material and equipment furnished shall be of current production by manufacturers regularly


engaged in the manufacture of such items, for which replacement parts are available.

2.2.1.2.When more than one unit of the same class of equipment or material is required, such units
shall be the products of a single manufacturer.

2.2.1.3.Equipment Assemblies and Components:

2.2.1.3.1. Components of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer, but
must meet TIA/EIA Category 6 criteria as a complete link system.

2.2.1.3.2. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which include components made by others,


shall assume complete responsibility for the final assembled unit.

2.2.1.3.3. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for the
intended service.

2.2.1.3.4. Moving parts or elements of equipment of the unit normally requiring lubrication
shall have means provided for such lubrication and shall be adequately lubricated at the
factory prior to delivery.

2.2.1.3.5. Factory cabling shall be identified on the equipment being furnished and on cabling
diagrams.

UNCONTROLLED COPY WHEN DOWNLOADED


Check the Master List to Verify That This is the Correct Revision Before Use
Date Printed: 4/17/2014
Revision 8 – 02/03/2014
AMC QPM # Revision

Quality Management System AMIFM-40001 8

Title: Division 27 Telecommunications Date: 04/17/2014 Page 12 of 61

Process Owner: Cheryl Hixon Approved By: Danny Thomas

2.2.1.4.Cable:

2.2.1.4.1. Fiber Optic Riser Cable:

 50 Micron Indoor or Outdoor Fiber Riser Rated Cable (as determined, whether plenum
or non-plenum cable is required) or approved equal (number of strands to be supplied
by AMK-222A).
 Multimode and single mode (number of multimode and single mode to be supplied by
AMK-222A).

2.2.1.4.2. Copper Telecommunications Riser Cable:

 24 AWG, Level 3, Anixter # CMR-02004EAA (number of pair to be supplied by


AMK-222A)

2.2.1.4.3. Station Cable

 4 pair, 24 AWG, Level 6, Berk-Tek 10136339.


 3 cables to each jack. One cable level 6, 24 gauge, 4 pair for the 2 RJ-11’s. The
other two cables level 6, 24 gauge, 4 pair for two RJ-45 LAN connections.

2.2.1.5.Telephone and Data Receptacles:

2.2.1.5.1. Provide each telephone and data outlet with the following components (proposed
substitutions must be submitted to AMK-222A for review prior to purchase/installation):

Description Comcode Number

2 ea – RJ-45 Connector (Orange ) MGS600BH-112


2 ea – RJ-11 Connector (Ivory) 107322158
1 ea – Blank 107067860
1 ea – Frame 106622277

2.2.1.6.Telephone and Network Equipment:

2.2.1.6.1. Figure two ports for every position reflected on the project.

2.2.1.6.2. Provide and install the following equipment as required (report any substitution prior
to purchase/installation to AMK-222A):
UNCONTROLLED COPY WHEN DOWNLOADED
Check the Master List to Verify That This is the Correct Revision Before Use
Date Printed: 4/17/2014
Revision 8 – 02/03/2014
AMC QPM # Revision

Quality Management System AMIFM-40001 8

Title: Division 27 Telecommunications Date: 04/17/2014 Page 13 of 61

Process Owner: Cheryl Hixon Approved By: Danny Thomas

Description Comcode/Part Number Unit


Cellular Equipment
Andrew Cellmax-D-CPUSF 20008570 EA
Trilogy 50ohm N Female Connector NFP01250 EA
2’ RG-142 N Male to N Male CXTA42A-2 EA
2F Zipcord Riser SC-APC to SC-APC 6’ 666602G5120006F EA
MA2000 TSX TTI-Service (Sprint) 2000-S80S90P-19-A-TC EA
MA2000 TSX Dual Service (ATT/Verizon) 2000-C85P19-A-TC EA
MA2000 Passive Service Combiner Unit SCU-4 EA
1U Pretium Connector Fiber Housing 500001652 EA
Microlab 2 Way Splitter (698-2700mhz) D2-69FN EA
Universal Plug & Play Module (SCAPC) 500001738 EA
N Female Connector for ½” TRG-NFP01250 EA
½ Plenum Coax AP6012 J 50 FT

Voice
100 PR Building Entrance Protector 107894925 EA
110-C4 103801247 Pack
110-C5 103801254 Pack
15 Foot BL CAT6 Patch Cord EV06-15-BL EA
15 Foot GY CAT6 Patch Cord EV06-15-GY EA
15 Foot YL CAT6 Patch Cord EV06-15-YL EA
188 w/Legs 104405113 EA
19" Rack 46353-503 EA
1U Rack Mountable Fiber Box CCH-01U EA
24 Port Patchmax CAT6 760060913 EA
25 Foot BL CAT6 Patch Cord EV06-25-BL EA
25 Foot GY CAT6 Patch Cord EV06-25-GY EA
25 Foot YL CAT6 Patch Cord EV06-25-YL EA
2U Rack Mountable Fiber Box CCH-02U EA
300 Pair Block w/Legs 107059917 EA
36MM/36SM fiber w/12 Fibers Per Tube 3 Meet Div 27 Specifications FT
36 X 36, SM 50 Micron um armored loose tube outdoor Meet Div 27 Specifications FT
48 Port Patchmax CAT6 760060921 EA
5 Foot BL CAT6 Patch Cord EV06-05-BL EA
5 Foot GY CAT6 Patch Cord EV06-05-GY EA
5 Foot YL CAT6 Patch Cord EV06-05-YL EA
1 Meter LC/LC LED Fiber Patch Cable, 10G OM3, Duplex, EVOFF-LL-LO-01M EA
1.8mm PVC Aqua
2 Meter LC/LC LED Fiber Patch Cable, 10G OM3, Duplex, EVOF-LL-LO-02M EA
1.8mm PVC Aqua

UNCONTROLLED COPY WHEN DOWNLOADED


Check the Master List to Verify That This is the Correct Revision Before Use
Date Printed: 4/17/2014
Revision 8 – 02/03/2014
AMC QPM # Revision

Quality Management System AMIFM-40001 8

Title: Division 27 Telecommunications Date: 04/17/2014 Page 14 of 61

Process Owner: Cheryl Hixon Approved By: Danny Thomas

Description Comcode/Part Number Unit


3 Meter LC/LC LED Fiber Patch Cable, 10G OM3, Duplex, EVOF-LL-LO-03M EA
1.8mm PVC Aqua
5 Meter LC/LC LED Fiber Patch Cable, 10G OM3, Duplex, EVOF-LL-LO-05M EA
1.8mm PVC Aqua
10 Meter LC/LC LED Fiber Patch Cable, 10G OM3, Duplex, EVOF-LL-LO-10M EA
1.8mm PVC Aqua
1 Meter LC/LC LED Fiber Patch Cable, MM-62.5/125, EVOF-LL-MD-01M EA
Duplex, 1.8mm PVC Orange
2 Meter LC/LC LED Fiber Patch Cable, MM-62.5/125, EVOF-LL-MD-02M EA
Duplex, 1.8mm PVC Orange
3 Meter LC/LC LED Fiber Patch Cable, MM-62.5/125, EVOF-LL-MD-03M EA
Duplex, 1.8mm PVC Orange
5 Meter LC/LC LED Fiber Patch Cable, MM-62.5/125, EVOF-LL-MD-05M EA
Duplex, 1.8mm PVC Orange
10 Meter LC/LC LED Fiber Patch Cable, MM-62.5/125, EVOF-LL-MD-10M EA
Duplex, 1.8mm PVC Orange
1 Meter LC/LC LED Fiber Patch Cable, SM-9/125, Duplex, EVOF-LL-SD-01M EA
1.8mm PVC Yellow
2 Meter LC/LC LED Fiber Patch Cable, SM-9/125, Duplex, EVOF-LL-SD-02M EA
1.8mm PVC Yellow
3 Meter LC/LC LED Fiber Patch Cable, SM-9/125, Duplex, EVOF-LL-SD-03M EA
1.8mm PVC Yellow
5 Meter LC/LC LED Fiber Patch Cable, SM-9/125, Duplex, EVOF-LL-SD-05M EA
1.8mm PVC Yellow
10 Meter LC/LC LED Fiber Patch Cable, SM-9/125, Duplex, EVOF-LL-SD-10M EA
1.8mm PVC Yellow
Cable Runway Ladder Rack 9' x 11.5" x 12' CPI 10250-712 EA
Avaya 6 Port Face Plate 108168592 Pack
Berk-Tek CAT6 Four Pair Station Cable Non-Plenum 10136339 FT
Blue Label 106657174 Pack
Bulkhead Flange Adapter 38195 EA
Butt Splice Kit CPI 11301-001 EA
But Splice Kit UL Classified Gold 16301-001 EA
Cable Management Racks 11729-703 Black EA
Cable Mount TMEH-58-C0 Pack
Cable Runway End Caps CPI 10642-001 Pack
Cable Runway J-Bolt Kit, Runway to Wall Support Bracket CPI 11308-001 EA
Cable Runway Junction Splice Kit Gold CPI 16302-001 EA
Cable Runway Ladder Rack 9' x 11.5" x 12' CPI 10250-712 EA
Cable Runway Mounting Plate 12" w/Angle Support Kit CPI 11421-712 EA
Endplate 8003542 EA
Fiber Cable Management CJP-02U EA
Fiber Fan-Out Kit FAN-BT25-12 EA

UNCONTROLLED COPY WHEN DOWNLOADED


Check the Master List to Verify That This is the Correct Revision Before Use
Date Printed: 4/17/2014
Revision 8 – 02/03/2014
AMC QPM # Revision

Quality Management System AMIFM-40001 8

Title: Division 27 Telecommunications Date: 04/17/2014 Page 15 of 61

Process Owner: Cheryl Hixon Approved By: Danny Thomas

Description Comcode/Part Number Unit


Fiber Rack Mountable Enclosure CCH-04U EA
Grounding Kit for 7' Rack CPI 41026-001 EA
J-Bolt Kit CPI 11308-001 EA
Jumper Trough Block 107831141 EA
LC Fiber Panel CCH-CP12-E4 EA
LC MM Fiber Connectors 95-050-99 EA
LC SM Fiber Connectors 95-200-99 EA
LC SM Fiber Panel CCH-CP12-A9 EA
MIC (FDDI) to ST Dual Fiber Jumpers, 50 Micron, MM 3 Siecor EA
Meters
Quad Frame 106622277 EA
Rack to Runway Mounting Plate CPI 10595-712 EA
Rack to Runway Mounting Plate for 9" to 12" CPI 10595-112 EA
SC to ST Dual Fiber Jumper, 62.5/125, MM 3 Meters Siecor EA
ST Connectors 95-100-01R EA
ST Panel FDC-CPIP-25 EA
Stainless 8.5" Preformed OSP Splice Can 8006330 EA
Triangular Support Brackets CPI 11746-712 EA
Wall Angle Support Kit for 9" Cable Runway CPI 11421-109 EA
WIC Box WIC-012-15 EA
WRS/WRP Series Low Profile Wall Mount Rack Black WRP-6 EA

Network
Network switches and associated equipment are purchased by the customer for all renovation/building
projects through AMK-222A (telecommunications). This process is initiated by creating a
Telecommunications Work Request and submitting it to AMK-222A. Please reference the AMP work order
number pertaining to the project/renovation. Upon receipt of this work order you will receive a quote and
estimated completion date. For questions or inquiries please call (405) 954-3651.

3. PART: EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

3.1.1. Install telephone and data products in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions,
the applicable requirements of TIA/EIA, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to
ensure that products serve the intended function.

3.1.2. All telephone and data cables shall be installed in conduit per blueprint requirements. The
established minimum conduit size is 1”.

UNCONTROLLED COPY WHEN DOWNLOADED


Check the Master List to Verify That This is the Correct Revision Before Use
Date Printed: 4/17/2014
Revision 8 – 02/03/2014
AMC QPM # Revision

Quality Management System AMIFM-40001 8

Title: Division 27 Telecommunications Date: 04/17/2014 Page 16 of 61

Process Owner: Cheryl Hixon Approved By: Danny Thomas

3.1.2.1.1. Cable Fill Ratio Table

# of
# of # of
EMT RGS PVC Cables
Cables Cables
Capacity Capacity Capacity for a
for a for a
Area - Area - Area - 40%
40% Fill 40% Fill
Conduit 40% fill 40% fill 40% fill Fill
Trade
Size (SQ IN) CAT 6 (SQ IN) CAT 6 (SQ IN) CAT 6
1" 0.346 8 0.355 8 0.333 8
1 1/4" 0.598 14 0.61 14 0.581 14
1 1/2" 0.814 19 0.829 20 0.794 19
2" 1.342 32 1.363 32 1.316 31
2 1/2" 2.343 55 1.946 46 1.878 44
3" 3.538 84 3.000 71 2.907 69
3 1/2" 4.618 109 4.004 95 3.895 92
4" 5.901 140 5.153 122 5.022 119
Cat 6 Diameter .232 in

3.1.2.2.Bond riser cables to the ground bar at both ends.

3.1.2.3.Terminate all pairs and fiber strands of riser cables.

3.1.2.4.Contractor shall mount racks in telephone rooms and equipment in the racks as specified in
the MMAC Telecommunications Generic Specifications Section. Configuration and turn-up
shall be accomplished by FAA, AMK-222A.

3.1.2.5.Installation of all termination equipment and other work in telephone equipment room shall
be accomplished under the direction of an FAA AMK-222A representative. Bundle cables
and secure with Velcro hook & loop, and provide ladder rack as required to neatly train all
cables. Label all cables in accordance with FAA standard nomenclature using approved
labeling material as specified in the Jack Labeling Section.
UNCONTROLLED COPY WHEN DOWNLOADED
Check the Master List to Verify That This is the Correct Revision Before Use
Date Printed: 4/17/2014
Revision 8 – 02/03/2014
AMC QPM # Revision

Quality Management System AMIFM-40001 8

Title: Division 27 Telecommunications Date: 04/17/2014 Page 17 of 61

Process Owner: Cheryl Hixon Approved By: Danny Thomas

3.1.2.6.Fiber Optic splices shall not be allowed unless specifically called for on the drawings or
preapproved by AMK-222A. Where fiber optic splices are specifically called for, provide
fusion splices. Maximum allowable splice attenuation for single-mode or multi-mode fiber
shall be 0.05 dB. Submit printout documentation showing the dB loss in the splice of each
strand.

3.1.2.7.Junction Boxes shall be 18”x18”x10”. If the stated size box cannot be installed due to space
restrictions, contact AMP-400. AMP-400 will consult with the Voice/Data Communications
team of the Telecommunications Unit at 954-3651 to submit request for substitution with the
next appropriate size junction box.

3.1.2.8. Turns in conduit shall be wide sweep turns with no bend in conduit greater than 90 or an
aggregate of bends in excess of 180 between pull points or pull boxes. For runs that total
more than 100 feet in length, pull points or pull boxes shall be inserted so that no segment
between points/boxes exceeds the 100 foot limit. Any turn greater than 90 will require
installation of a junction box. If a junction box is required, contact AMP-400. AMP-400 will
contact Voice/Data Communications team of the Telecommunications Unit at 954-3651 for
determination of junction box size requirement. Conduit shall be bonded to ground on one
or both ends.

3.2. EXAMINATION OF SURFACE CONDITIONS

3.2.1. Prior to the start of work, the telecommunications subcontractor shall carefully inspect the
installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where installation
may properly commence. Start of work indicates acceptance of conditions.

3.2.2. Install equipment in accordance with applicable codes and regulations, the original design and
the referenced standards.

3.2.3. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the AMP-400 Project Manager.

3.2.4. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions and discrepancies have been fully
resolved.

3.3. TESTING

3.3.1. Fiber Optic Cable Testing:

UNCONTROLLED COPY WHEN DOWNLOADED


Check the Master List to Verify That This is the Correct Revision Before Use
Date Printed: 4/17/2014
Revision 8 – 02/03/2014
AMC QPM # Revision

Quality Management System AMIFM-40001 8

Title: Division 27 Telecommunications Date: 04/17/2014 Page 18 of 61

Process Owner: Cheryl Hixon Approved By: Danny Thomas

3.3.1.1.Contractor shall perform an Optical Time Domain Reflector (OTDR) test to verify integrity
of the cable when received from the manufacturer (test cable on the reel) and again to ensure
the cable was not damaged during the installation.

3.3.1.2.Contractor shall perform an end-to-end attenuation test to verify proper termination of each
fiber.

3.3.1.2.1.1. Contractor shall submit each test to AMP-400 for acceptance and approval by the
FAA. AMP-400 shall provide test results to AMK-222A for review and approval.
Contractor shall replace any defective or noncompliant cable at no additional cost
to the FAA.
3.3.1.3.

3.3.2. OTDR Testing:

3.3.2.1.Upon delivery of the cable to the jobsite, and prior to installation, test each strand of cable
with Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) with multi-mode and single-mode
modules. Provide printouts to document that all fiber optic strands meet specified criteria
before installation.

3.3.2.2.After cable placement, perform a second OTDR test to verify the cable was not damaged
during installation; also verify distances of cable runs and system integrity. Enter all results
into the system documentation.

3.3.2.3.After strands are terminated, perform an OTDR end-to-end test from each end to prove the
terminations. Enter all results into the system documentation.

3.3.2.4.Single mode fiber will be tested at 1310 nm and 1550 nm. Multi mode fiber will be tested at
850 nm and 1300 nm.

3.3.3. Performance Specifications:

3.3.3.1.All fiber shall be SX laser optimized. SX laser optimized cable shall meet the following
minimum specifications:

Maximum Attenuation:
<=2.4 dB at 850 nm
<=0.7 dB at 1300 nm

UNCONTROLLED COPY WHEN DOWNLOADED


Check the Master List to Verify That This is the Correct Revision Before Use
Date Printed: 4/17/2014
Revision 8 – 02/03/2014
AMC QPM # Revision

Quality Management System AMIFM-40001 8

Title: Division 27 Telecommunications Date: 04/17/2014 Page 19 of 61

Process Owner: Cheryl Hixon Approved By: Danny Thomas

Single Mode Specification:


1.0 dB at 1310 nm
1.0 dB at 1550 nm

Minimum Bandwidth:
200 MHz.km at 850 nm
500 MHz.km at 1300 nm

Glass Geometry
Core Diameter 50.0 =/- 2.5um
Cladding Diameter 125.0 =/- 2.0um
Core-Clad Concentricity <= 1.5um
Cladding Non-Circularity <= 1.0%
Core Non-circularity <= 5%

3.3.3.2.Copper Riser Cable Testing:

3.3.3.2.1. Riser Cable Testing:

3.3.3.2.1.1.End –To-End Polarity Testing: A minimum of 99% pair functional connectivity


shall be verified by end-to-end polarity testing. Polarity test shall verify correct tip,
ring and pair.

3.3.3.2.1.2.TDR Test: Perform a Time Domain Reflectivity test to verify splices and correct
gauge of wire throughout the run.

3.3.3.2.1.3.Documentation: Provide complete documentation of each test performed and


printout of TDR test.

3.3.3.2.1.4.Contractor shall submit each test to AMP-400 for acceptance and approval by the
FAA. AMP-400 shall provide test results to AMK-222A for review and approval.
Contractor shall replace any defective or noncompliant cable at no additional cost
to the FAA.

3.4. PROTECTION OF SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT

UNCONTROLLED COPY WHEN DOWNLOADED


Check the Master List to Verify That This is the Correct Revision Before Use
Date Printed: 4/17/2014
Revision 8 – 02/03/2014
AMC QPM # Revision

Quality Management System AMIFM-40001 8

Title: Division 27 Telecommunications Date: 04/17/2014 Page 20 of 61

Process Owner: Cheryl Hixon Approved By: Danny Thomas

3.4.1.1.Asbestos Survey: Prior to the disturbance of any building materials, construction personnel
must know the results of an asbestos survey.

3.4.1.2.Lead Survey: Prior to the disturbance of any building materials, construction personnel must
know the results of a lead survey.

3.4.1.3.Protect materials and equipment from damage during storage at the site and throughout the
construction period. Equipment and materials shall be protected during shipment and storage
against physical damage, dirt, theft, moisture, extreme temperature and rain.

3.4.1.4.Damage from rain, dirt, sun and ground water shall be prevented by storing the equipment on
elevated supports and covering them on sides with securely fastened protective rigid or
flexible waterproof coverings.

3.4.1.5.During installation, equipment shall be protected against entry of foreign matter on the inside
and be vacuum cleaned both inside and outside before testing, operating or painting.

3.4.1.6.As determined by AMK-222A, damaged equipment shall be fully repaired or shall be


removed and replaced with new equipment to fully comply with requirements of the
documentation provided. Decisions of AMK-222A shall be final.

3.4.1.7.Painted surfaces shall be protected with removable heavy Kraft paper, sheet vinyl or equal,
installed at the factory and removed prior to final inspection. Damaged paint on equipment
and materials shall be repainted with painting equipment and finished with same quality of
paint and workmanship as used by the manufacturer.

3.5. WORK PERFORMANCE

3.5.1. Coordinate location of equipment and conduit with other trades to minimize interference.

3.5.2. Holes through concrete and masonry in new and existing structures shall be cut with a diamond
core drill or concrete saw upon approval of the structural engineer of record for the base building.
Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, hand or manual hammer type drill shall not be allowed, except
where permitted by the AMP-400 Project Manager as required by limited working space.

3.5.2.1.Holes shall be located so as not to affect structural sections such as ribs or beams.

3.5.2.2.Holes shall be laid out in advance. The AMP-400 Project Manager shall be advised prior to
drilling through structural sections, for determination of proper layout.

UNCONTROLLED COPY WHEN DOWNLOADED


Check the Master List to Verify That This is the Correct Revision Before Use
Date Printed: 4/17/2014
Revision 8 – 02/03/2014
AMC QPM # Revision

Quality Management System AMIFM-40001 8

Title: Division 27 Telecommunications Date: 04/17/2014 Page 21 of 61

Process Owner: Cheryl Hixon Approved By: Danny Thomas

3.5.2.3.Structural Penetrations: Where conduit, wire ways and other raceways pass through fire
partitions, fire walls or walls and floors, provide FAA approved effective barrier against the
spread of fire, smoke and gases.

3.6. ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT

3.6.1. Equipment shall be installed in location and manner that will allow convenient access for
maintenance and inspection.

3.6.2. Working spaces shall not be less than specified in the National Electrical Code for voltages
specified.

3.6.3. Where the AMP-400 Project Manager determines that the telecommunications subcontractor has
installed equipment not conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance, equipment shall be
removed and reinstalled, one time only, as directed by the AMP-400 Project Manager, at no
additional cost to the FAA. “Conveniently accessible” is defined as being capable of being reached
without the use of ladders or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as motors,
pumps, belt guards, transformers, piping and duct work.

UNCONTROLLED COPY WHEN DOWNLOADED


Check the Master List to Verify That This is the Correct Revision Before Use
Date Printed: 4/17/2014
Revision 8 – 02/03/2014
AMC QPM # Revision

Quality Management System AMIFM-40001 8

Title: Division 27 Telecommunications Date: 04/17/2014 Page 22 of 61

Process Owner: Cheryl Hixon Approved By: Danny Thomas

3.7. CABLE TERMINATION AND DRESS

3.7.1. Installation of signal, video, and communication and control conductors shall adhere to the
following:

3.7.2. Cables shall be dressed, labeled and hook & loop wrap in cabinets, racks and/or at cross connect
backboard to present a neat, logical and orderly installation. At the discretion of the
telecommunications subcontractor, cable duct with removable covers may be installed in
equipment cabinets and control consoles to facilitate satisfying this requirement.

3.7.3. Cables shall be secured to equipment cabinet backboards, console members or to other system
components using cable clamps and hook & loop wraps. The telecommunications subcontractor
shall furnish and install cable support posts to facilitate system installation.

3.7.4. Cables and conductors shall be terminated with cable termination connectors compatible with the
specific termination.

3.7.5. Metallic cables and conductors entering the facility from a point exterior to the building shall be
equipped with lightning protection. Protector shall be located at the nearest point of cable entry in
the building.

3.8. UPS POWER

3.8.1. All electrical circuits supplying power to system components as part of telecommunications
work shall be connected to existing UPS power. If UPS is not available, advise AMP-400 to
contact AMK-222A at (405) 954-3651.

3.9. CLEANING

3.9.1. During construction, and prior to FAA acceptance of the building, remove from the premises and
dispose of packing material and debris caused by telecommunications work.

3.9.2. Remove dust and debris from interiors and exteriors of electrical equipment. Clean accessible
current carrying elements prior to being energized.

3.10. COMPLETION

3.10.1. Upon completion of the work, remove excess debris, materials, equipment, apparatus, tools and
similar items. Leave the premises clean, neat and orderly.

UNCONTROLLED COPY WHEN DOWNLOADED


Check the Master List to Verify That This is the Correct Revision Before Use
Date Printed: 4/17/2014
Revision 8 – 02/03/2014
AMC QPM # Revision

Quality Management System AMIFM-40001 8

Title: Division 27 Telecommunications Date: 04/17/2014 Page 23 of 61

Process Owner: Cheryl Hixon Approved By: Danny Thomas

3.10.2. Systems shall be complete and operational and controls shall be set and calibrated.

3.10.3. Testing, start-up and cleaning work shall be complete.

3.10.4. Special tools for proper operation and maintenance of equipment provided under this
specification shall be delivered to the FAA.

3.10.5. All punch list items must be corrected prior to acceptance of project.

3.11. TESTING AND VERIFICATION

3.11.1. The telecommunications subcontractor shall verify that requirements of this specification are
met. Verification shall be through a combination of analyses, inspections, demonstrations and
tests, as described below.

3.11.2. Verification by Inspection: Verification by inspection includes examination of items and


comparison of pertinent characteristics against the qualitative or quantitative standard set forth in
the specifications. Inspection may require moving or partially disassembling the item to
accomplish the verification, included as part of the work at no additional cost to the FAA.

3.11.3. Verification by Test and Demonstration: The telecommunications subcontractor shall verify by
formal demonstrations or tests that the requirements of this specification have been met. The
telecommunications subcontractor shall demonstrate that the telecommunications systems
components and subsystems meet specification requirements in the “as-installed” operating
environment during the “System Operation Test.” While no formal environmental testing is
required, the telecommunications subcontractor shall measure and record temperature, humidity
and other environmental parameters and the environmental conditions, which were encountered
during the “System Operation Test.”

3.11.4. Perform commissioning and pretest prior to enclosure of walls.

3.11.5. Perform system operation tests after full enclosure of walls.

3.11.6. System Operation Tests Conducted Upon Completion Of Work: Upon completion of the
telecommunications subcontractor’s work, subject the system to functional and operational tests.
When required, corrections determined by initial test results, have been completed, fully retest the
system. The FAA shall be notified in writing not less than seven days in advance of the date of
proposed final testing and inspection. The advance notice shall include certification that the
installation is complete and operable and that the telecommunications subcontractor has

UNCONTROLLED COPY WHEN DOWNLOADED


Check the Master List to Verify That This is the Correct Revision Before Use
Date Printed: 4/17/2014
Revision 8 – 02/03/2014
AMC QPM # Revision

Quality Management System AMIFM-40001 8

Title: Division 27 Telecommunications Date: 04/17/2014 Page 24 of 61

Process Owner: Cheryl Hixon Approved By: Danny Thomas

satisfactorily performed the final tests specified herein. The acceptance testing and final inspection
shall be accomplished in the presence of the FAA and the AMP-400 Project Manager. At least ten
days prior to scheduled system completion, the telecommunications subcontractor shall submit, for
approval by the FAA a test plan to completely test telecommunications systems. The
telecommunications subcontractor shall include in test plan, for acceptance by the FAA (AMK-
222A and the AMP-400 Project Manager), a complete and detailed final acceptance test check-off
list (“punch list). The list shall be a complete representation of specified functions and conditions,
including contingency, priority and abnormal modes of operation. The arrangements of the list
shall be such as to provide an orderly method of tabulating checks of system features, response and
operation. The punch list shall include a designated space adjacent to each test procedure where
the FAA can initial to indicate compliance with each test procedure. At the time of final
acceptance testing, required tests shall be repeated and defects corrected until the system is found
to be acceptable to AMK-222A and AMP. The telecommunications subcontractor shall maintain a
log of test activities and results. Both electronic and printed copies of this log including copies of
the signed-off punch list shall be submitted to the FAA within seven days of the testing. Final tests
shall include, but not limited to, the following:

3.11.7. Test all category cables in accordance with current TIA/EIA specifications for that category of
cabling with a test device meeting or exceeding level IIe accuracy.

3.11.8. Bi-directional attenuation (loss) test for each multimode fiber strand at 850nm and 1300nm
wavelengths and each single mode fiber strand at 1310nm and 1550nm. Conduct tests in
accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14-A, Method B for multimode fibers, and ANSI/TIA/EIA-
526-7, Method A.1 for single mode fibers and with test instrument manufacturers printed
instructions. Demonstrate that measured link loss does not exceed the “worst case” allowable loss
which is the sum of: the connectors loss (based on the number of mated connector pairs at the
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A maximum allowable loss of 0.75dB per mated pair) and the optical fiber
loss (based on the maximum allowable loss of 3.5 dB/km @ 850n